Prove2Me
Navigate
DiscoverCollectionsFormalpediaBlogsUsersMomentumMy Missions+
Prove2Me
⌕
Log in

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

Analysis

320 missions · 177 completed

Missions

Open143Completed177All320
Convex OptimizationDynamical SystemsOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

A Differential Equation for Modeling Nesterov's Accelerated Gradient Method: Theory and Insights I: The ODE Ẍ + (3/t)Ẋ + ∇f(X) = 0 with X(0) = x₀, Ẋ(0) = 0 Has a Unique Global SolutionResearch Paper

Why this ODE needs a well-posedness theorem

Nesterov’s accelerated gradient method is a discrete procedure for minimizing a smooth convex function. Its iterates use both a gradient step and a momentum term, so the position at the next step depends on recent motion as well as on the current gradient. Su, Boyd, and Candès study a continuous-time model of that behavior: a trajectory whose acceleration is driven by the negative gradient and opposed by a time-dependent damping term. The model is useful only if its prescribed starting point determines an actual trajectory. The first theorem of the paper supplies that guarantee for the damping coefficient 3/t3/t3/t. Su, Boyd, and Candès, 2015, Theorem 1.

The coefficient 3/t3/t3/t is undefined at the stated initial time t=0t=0t=0. Standard results for differential equations with a continuous right-hand side at the initial time therefore cannot be applied directly. The existence and uniqueness claim is substantive: it makes the trajectory used in the paper’s later rate and restart theorems a defined mathematical object, including its behavior at the singular endpoint. The source proves the result; this mission asks for a machine-checked formalization of its statement and its supporting appendix lemmas.

The setting

Fix a dimension nnn, a starting point x0∈Rnx_0\in\mathbb R^nx0​∈Rn, and a real-valued objective fff. For a constant L>0L>0L>0, the paper’s class FL\mathcal F_LFL​ consists of functions that are convex, continuously differentiable, and have an LLL-Lipschitz gradient:

∥∇f(x)−∇f(y)∥≤L∥x−y∥for all x,y∈Rn.\|\nabla f(x)-\nabla f(y)\|\le L\|x-y\| \qquad\text{for all }x,y\in\mathbb R^n.∥∇f(x)−∇f(y)∥≤L∥x−y∥for all x,y∈Rn.

The larger class F∞\mathcal F_\inftyF∞​ is the union of these classes over positive LLL. In particular, the objective need not be strongly convex and need not have a minimizer for this mission.

A solution is a position X:[0,∞)→RnX:[0,\infty)\to\mathbb R^nX:[0,∞)→Rn and its velocity V=X˙V=\dot XV=X˙, starting at X(0)=x0X(0)=x_0X(0)=x0​ and V(0)=0V(0)=0V(0)=0, that satisfy equation (3) at every positive time:

V˙(t)+3tV(t)+∇f(X(t))=0,t>0.\dot V(t)+\frac{3}{t}V(t)+\nabla f(X(t))=0,\qquad t>0.V˙(t)+t3​V(t)+∇f(X(t))=0,t>0.

The trajectory is continuously differentiable through the initial endpoint, with a right derivative there, and twice continuously differentiable for t>0t>0t>0. The paper also uses a smoothed equation indexed by δ>0\delta>0δ>0, replacing 3/t3/t3/t with 3/max⁡(δ,t)3/\max(\delta,t)3/max(δ,t). Its solutions are denoted XδX_\deltaXδ​, and its velocity-growth quantity is

Mδ(t)=sup⁡0<u≤t∥X˙δ(u)∥u.M_\delta(t)=\sup_{0<u\le t}\frac{\|\dot X_\delta(u)\|}{u}.Mδ​(t)=0<u≤tsup​u∥X˙δ​(u)∥​.

For local uniqueness, two solutions X,YX,YX,Y on [0,a)[0,a)[0,a) are compared using M~(t)=sup⁡0≤u<t∥X˙(u)−Y˙(u)∥\widetilde M(t)=\sup_{0\le u<t}\|\dot X(u)-\dot Y(u)\|M(t)=sup0≤u<t​∥X˙(u)−Y˙(u)∥. These quantities appear in the appendix lemmas and are represented by pointwise bounds in the formal statements.

Formalization targets

The goal is Theorem 1, the well-posedness of equation (3). For every f∈F∞f\in\mathcal F_\inftyf∈F∞​ and every x0x_0x0​, it asserts both existence of a global trajectory with the regularity above and uniqueness on nonnegative time:

∃X solving (3) from (x0,0),X,Y both solve (3) from (x0,0)⟹X(t)=Y(t)(t≥0).\exists X\ \text{solving (3) from }(x_0,0), \qquad X,Y\ \text{both solve (3) from }(x_0,0) \Longrightarrow X(t)=Y(t)\quad(t\ge0).∃X solving (3) from (x0​,0),X,Y both solve (3) from (x0​,0)⟹X(t)=Y(t)(t≥0).

The milestone list follows the numbered statements in Appendix A. Lemma 16 controls the change in ∇f\nabla f∇f along a smoothed trajectory. Lemmas 15 and 17 bound MδM_\deltaMδ​ on the initial smoothing interval and beyond it, with the explicit thresholds δ<6/L\delta<\sqrt{6/L}δ<6/L​ and t<12/Lt<\sqrt{12/L}t<12/L​. Lemma 18 states that the family of smoothed trajectories with δ=3/L/2m\delta=\sqrt{3/L}/2^mδ=3/L​/2m is uniformly bounded and equicontinuous on [0,6/L][0,\sqrt{6/L}][0,6/L​]. Lemma 14 gives existence for equation (3). Lemma 20 bounds the difference between gradients along two local solutions, and Lemma 19 gives uniqueness in a neighborhood of zero. The goal and milestones preserve the source’s domains, constants, and order of dependence.

What the result provides

Theorem 1 permits the rest of the paper to refer to “the” trajectory of equation (3) from a specified initial point. In particular, statements about its objective value, energy, and restarts need an actual trajectory, and uniqueness makes those statements independent of a choice of solution. The appendix estimates also provide reusable facts about this singular second-order equation: quantitative control of smoothed velocities and local agreement at the singular time.

The paper proves Theorem 1 and the seven listed lemmas on pp. 6 and 28–32. This mission does not claim a new analytical result. Its output would be checked Lean statements and, when solvers finish the proofs, a machine-checked development of the singular initial-value problem. The formal definitions are shared by all items in this mission; the lemmas can be reused in later formal work on accelerated gradient trajectories. No machine-checked proof of these particular statements is being claimed by the draft proposal.

The central difficulty

The initial time is precisely where the damping 3/t3/t3/t has no finite value. Treating the problem as an ordinary initial-value problem at t=0t=0t=0 leaves the differential equation undefined there. Imposing the equation at t=0t=0t=0 after Lean’s total division would instead change it: Lean assigns a value to division by zero, while the paper imposes equation (3) only for t>0t>0t>0. The demanded derivative at zero is one-sided, and control of the behavior as t↓0t\downarrow0t↓0 is part of the result.

The smoothed equations are regular at zero, but a statement about each smoothed trajectory does not by itself give a solution of the original singular equation. The appendix’s uniform bounds and equicontinuity are formulated on a common compact interval for a specified sequence of smoothing parameters. Uniqueness has a second boundary issue: local agreement near zero must be connected to ordinary uniqueness at positive time to obtain agreement for every t≥0t\ge0t≥0.

Formalization scope

The Lean space is EuclideanSpace R (Fin n)\mathrm{EuclideanSpace}\ \mathbb R\ (\mathrm{Fin}\ n)EuclideanSpace R (Fin n), with its Euclidean norm; nnn is arbitrary. The objective class includes convexity, C1C^1C1 regularity, a positive Lipschitz constant, and a globally Lipschitz gradient. A solution is encoded as a pair (X,V)(X,V)(X,V), so V=X˙V=\dot XV=X˙ is witnessed by derivative assertions rather than by a total derivative operator. The initial conditions specify X(0)=x0X(0)=x_0X(0)=x0​, V(0)=0V(0)=0V(0)=0, a right derivative of XXX, and right continuity of VVV. The differential equation and ordinary derivatives are required only at positive times. For the smoothed equation, δ>0\delta>0δ>0 is part of the solution predicate.

These choices rule out a vacuous solution predicate and prevent division by zero from defining a different equation. Lean functions are represented on all real times, but the source’s solution lives on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞); uniqueness is therefore equality on that half-line. At negative times the formal representatives are unrestricted. The paper’s real suprema MδM_\deltaMδ​ and M~\widetilde MM are expressed as bounds on every member of their defining ranges, so an empty or unbounded real supremum cannot acquire a misleading default value. Every denominator in Lemmas 15 and 17 has the paper’s strict threshold in its hypotheses.

A full proof development needs ordinary differential equation existence and uniqueness at positive time, continuity and derivative facts at the right endpoint, and compactness of uniformly bounded equicontinuous families. The definitions of the objective class and solution predicates, the quantitative estimates, and the local uniqueness statement are welcome solver contributions. The target is the source theorem with its stated hypotheses and conclusion; a special objective, a weakened time interval, or a proof by an impossible hypothesis does not close it.

Selected references

  • Weijie Su, Stephen Boyd, and Emmanuel J. Candès, A Differential Equation for Modeling Nesterov’s Accelerated Gradient Method: Theory and Insights, arXiv:1503.01243v2, 2015; published in Journal of Machine Learning Research 17(153), 2016. Preprint.
9 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimizationProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

On the Heavy-Tail Behavior of the Distributionally Robust Newsvendor 1: Worst-Case Expected Shortage under Known First and αth Moments Equals That of a Regularly Varying Demand of Tail Index αResearch Paper

Motivation

A newsvendor chooses an order quantity before seeing demand. Unsold units have no salvage value, while demand above the order quantity cannot be filled. If the demand law is unknown but a few moments are known, the decision maker may minimize cost against the worst distribution consistent with those moments. Das, Dhara and Natarajan study this distributionally robust problem when the known moments are the first and an arbitrary real moment of order α>1\alpha>1α>1 Das, Dhara and Natarajan, 2019. The high-demand tail matters especially when the cost ratio favors large orders. The mission asks what tail behavior is implicitly selected by the robust objective, even though each admissible distribution has a finite α\alphaαth moment.

The two-moment case α=2\alpha=2α=2 goes back to Scarf's newsvendor bound. The paper extends the model to noninteger α\alphaα and gives lower and upper shortage bounds before proving its tail result. Its preprint is the pinned source for every statement here; the proof of each numbered result follows that result in the paper Das, Dhara and Natarajan, 2019, §§1, 3–4.

Setting

Let q≥0q\ge0q≥0 be the order quantity and let d~≥0\tilde d\ge0d~≥0 be random demand. The expected shortage under a demand law FFF is EF[(d~−q)+]\mathbb E_F[(\tilde d-q)^+]EF​[(d~−q)+], where x+=max⁡(x,0)x^+=\max(x,0)x+=max(x,0). Fix α>1\alpha>1α>1, a positive mean m1m_1m1​, and a moment mα>m1αm_\alpha>m_1^\alphamα​>m1α​. The moment ambiguity set F1,α\mathcal F_{1,\alpha}F1,α​ contains all probability laws supported on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) whose first moment is m1m_1m1​ and whose finite α\alphaαth moment is mαm_\alphamα​. Its worst-case expected shortage is

Π1,α(q)=sup⁡F∈F1,αEF[(d~−q)+].\Pi_{1,\alpha}(q)=\sup_{F\in\mathcal F_{1,\alpha}}\mathbb E_F[(\tilde d-q)^+].Π1,α​(q)=F∈F1,α​sup​EF​[(d~−q)+].

For a critical ratio η∈[0,1)\eta\in[0,1)η∈[0,1), the robust newsvendor minimizes (1−η)q+Π1,α(q)(1-\eta)q+\Pi_{1,\alpha}(q)(1−η)q+Π1,α​(q) over q≥0q\ge0q≥0. This mission centers on Π1,α\Pi_{1,\alpha}Π1,α​; the optimal-order threshold is treated in the companion mission. The ambiguity set and objective are the paper's (3.1)–(3.3) Das, Dhara and Natarajan, 2019, pp. 10–11.

A positive function uuu is regularly varying with index ρ\rhoρ if u(tx)/u(x)→tρu(tx)/u(x)\to t^\rhou(tx)/u(x)→tρ as x→∞x\to\inftyx→∞ for every t>0t>0t>0. The notation is u∈RVρu\in RV_\rhou∈RVρ​. For a probability law FFF, its survival tail is Fˉ(x)=PF(d~>x)\bar F(x)=P_F(\tilde d>x)Fˉ(x)=PF​(d~>x); Fˉ∈RV−α\bar F\in RV_{-\alpha}Fˉ∈RV−α​ means a tail parameter α\alphaα Das, Dhara and Natarajan, 2019, §4.1, p. 26.

Formalization targets

Worst-case shortage

The first target is Theorem 4.3(a):

Π1,α∈RV−(α−1).\Pi_{1,\alpha}\in RV_{-(\alpha-1)}.Π1,α​∈RV−(α−1)​.

It covers every α>1\alpha>1α>1, including α=2\alpha=2α=2. Scarf's piecewise formula (1.3), Proposition 3.3, and both parts of Proposition 3.4 supply the paper's cited bounds. Each upper bound retains its strict quantity threshold and its printed denominator Das, Dhara and Natarajan, 2019, pp. 3, 15, 19, 28.

One representative demand law

The full goal, Theorem 4.3, also states that a nonnegative probability law F∗F^*F∗ exists outside F1,α\mathcal F_{1,\alpha}F1,α​ with

EF∗[(d~∗−q)+]=Π1,α(q)(q≥0),Fˉ∗∈RV−α.\mathbb E_{F^*}[(\tilde d^*-q)^+]=\Pi_{1,\alpha}(q)\quad(q\ge0), \qquad \bar F^*\in RV_{-\alpha}.EF∗​[(d~∗−q)+]=Π1,α​(q)(q≥0),Fˉ∗∈RV−α​.

Every moment of F∗F^*F∗ of order 0≤a<α0\le a<\alpha0≤a<α is finite, while every moment of order a≥αa\ge\alphaa≥α is infinite. The milestone list includes the properties of Π1,α\Pi_{1,\alpha}Π1,α​ stated in §2.1 (non-increasing, convex, Π1,α(q)+q=m1\Pi_{1,\alpha}(q)+q=m_1Π1,α​(q)+q=m1​ for q≤0q\le0q≤0, Π1,α(q)→0\Pi_{1,\alpha}(q)\to0Π1,α​(q)→0), the single-law representation (2.1) and the two stated Karamata results used to characterize the tail Das, Dhara and Natarajan, 2019, pp. 6, 27–30.

High critical ratios

A companion milestone is Proposition 4.1. For η∈(0,1)\eta\in(0,1)η∈(0,1) let qη∗q^*_\etaqη∗​ be a robust optimal order quantity and Cη∗C^*_\etaCη∗​ the optimal robust cost. Then qη∗q^*_\etaqη∗​ is optimal for the standard newsvendor with demand law F∗F^*F∗, and

qη∗∼α−1α 11−η Cη∗,η→1q^*_\eta\sim\frac{\alpha-1}{\alpha}\,\frac{1}{1-\eta}\,C^*_\eta,\qquad \eta\to1qη∗​∼αα−1​1−η1​Cη∗​,η→1

Das, Dhara and Natarajan, 2019, p. 30, (4.9). It is a consequence of the goal, not a step toward it.

Significance

The theorem connects a decision made against an entire moment class to a single effective law. That law matches the robust expected shortage for every admissible order quantity but has an infinite α\alphaαth moment, so it does not belong to the class being optimized over. This distinction explains why large robust orders behave as though demand were heavy tailed. The paper also uses the result to relate the robust optimal order quantity to the optimal cost at high service levels in Proposition 4.1 Das, Dhara and Natarajan, 2019, pp. 30–31.

The mathematical theorem was proved in the cited paper. This mission asks for a Lean proof of its exact statement and reusable formal results for moment-constrained probability laws, stop-loss transforms, and regular variation. No machine-checked proof of these particular statements is part of the present draft. The cited bounds and analytic results are posed as separate milestones so their hypotheses and constants remain inspectable.

Difficulty

Pointwise optimization over demand laws does not automatically give one law that attains the worst-case shortage for every qqq. For a fixed qqq, an extremal law may depend on qqq, as Scarf's formula illustrates Das, Dhara and Natarajan, 2019, p. 3. The theorem asks for a single F∗F^*F∗ and then a precise tail index and a sharp moment cutoff. A generic upper bound on shortages would establish neither the representative law nor its infinite α\alphaαth moment. The regimes 1<α<21<\alpha<21<α<2, α=2\alpha=2α=2, and α>2\alpha>2α>2 have different cited upper-bound statements, yet the final theorem has no regime restriction.

Formalization scope

Lean represents a demand law by a Borel measure on R\mathbb RR with probability mass one and zero mass below zero. Membership in F1,α\mathcal F_{1,\alpha}F1,α​ requires both real moments to be integrable; this makes the moment equalities genuine rather than default values of a nonintegrable Bochner integral. Under m1>0m_1>0m1​>0 and mα>m1αm_\alpha>m_1^\alphamα​>m1α​, the paper's two-point law (3.6) makes the ambiguity set nonempty. Its shortage values are bounded above by m1+∣q∣m_1+|q|m1​+∣q∣, so the real supremum defining Π1,α\Pi_{1,\alpha}Π1,α​ is finite and meaningful. The strict thresholds in Propositions 3.3–3.4 keep their power denominators positive Das, Dhara and Natarajan, 2019, pp. 12, 15, 19.

Regular variation includes eventual positivity, excluding a zero-over-zero ratio from passing as a tail law. Infinite moments of F∗F^*F∗ are lower Lebesgue integrals in extended nonnegative reals. The existence of F∗F^*F∗ is asserted rather than built into a definition. Theorem 4.2(b)'s displayed limit has a negative sign in the preprint, although its nonnegative numerator and denominator require the positive value α\alphaα; the formal statement uses the corrected sign. Its regularly varying tail integral is eventually positive, which ensures genuine finite tail integrals for large lower limits. Theorem 4.1 explicitly requires local integrability. Two encodings would trivialize the goal and are excluded: defining F∗F^*F∗ inside the statement (it is existential), and a regular-variation predicate satisfied by the zero function. The properties of Π\PiΠ and the representation (2.1) are stated for F1,α\mathcal F_{1,\alpha}F1,α​, the instance the paper uses, rather than for a general finite-mean ambiguity set. In Proposition 4.1 the optimal cost is the cost at the chosen optimizer, the statement holds for every selection of optimizers, and ∼\sim∼ means that the ratio of the two sides tends to 111 as η↑1\eta\uparrow1η↑1. These analytic conventions and the probability and measure infrastructure can be reused beyond this mission. Contributions to any of the ten source milestones, including the difficult root assertion in Proposition 3.4(b), are welcome.

Selected references

  • B. Das, A. Dhara, and K. Natarajan, On the Heavy-Tail Behavior of the Distributionally Robust Newsvendor, Operations Research 69(4), 2021; preprint arXiv:1806.05379v2, 2019. Preprint, DOI.
  • H. Scarf, A min-max solution of an inventory problem, in K. Arrow, S. Karlin and H. Scarf (eds.), Studies in the Mathematical Theory of Inventory and Production, Stanford University Press, 1958, pp. 201–209.
  • A. Shapiro and A. Kleywegt, Minimax analysis of stochastic problems, Optimization Methods and Software 17, 2002, pp. 523–542. DOI.
  • N. H. Bingham, C. M. Goldie and J. L. Teugels, Regular Variation, Cambridge University Press, 1987. DOI.
12 thms2 active usersReviewed
Optimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Semismooth and Semiconvex Functions in Constrained Optimization II: A Semismooth Composition of Semismooth Functions Is Semismooth, with a Chain Rule for Generalized GradientsResearch Paper

Why composition matters

Optimization models often build an objective from several intermediate quantities: constraints, penalties, and transformed measurements are evaluated first, then combined by an outer function. These intermediate and outer functions can be Lipschitz without being differentiable at the point of interest. Ordinary differentiation supplies no chain rule there. The generalized-gradient framework gives a set of possible first-order slopes, while semismoothness provides stronger directional behavior along sequences approaching the point. Mifflin's IIASA report asks whether this behavior survives such compositions and how the generalized gradient of the result relates to those of its ingredients.

The report first establishes basic properties of the generalized gradient in §2, including almost-everywhere differentiability and a nonsmooth mean value theorem. Section 4 then states a chain-rule inclusion as Theorem 4 and the semismooth composition result as Theorem 5. The report is dated December 1976; a journal version appeared in 1977. The mission cites theorem numbers and pages from the report version throughout. No claim about differences between the report and journal texts is needed here.

Setting and definitions

Work in finite-dimensional Euclidean spaces. Let fi:Rn→Rf_i:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb Rfi​:Rn→R, for i=1,…,mi=1,\ldots,mi=1,…,m, be component functions, and let E:Rm→RE:\mathbb R^m\to\mathbb RE:Rm→R be an outer function. Define the component map YYY and the composite FFF by

Y(x)=(f1(x),…,fm(x)),F(x)=E(Y(x)).Y(x)=(f_1(x),\ldots,f_m(x)),\qquad F(x)=E(Y(x)).Y(x)=(f1​(x),…,fm​(x)),F(x)=E(Y(x)).

The functions are locally Lipschitz in the report's precise sense: on each bounded subset of their Euclidean domain they have a finite Lipschitz constant. For a scalar function HHH, a point xxx, and a direction ddd, the generalized directional derivative H0(x;d)H^0(x;d)H0(x;d) is the joint upper limit of [H(x+h+td)−H(x+h)]/t[H(x+h+td)-H(x+h)]/t[H(x+h+td)−H(x+h)]/t as h→0h\to0h→0 and t↓0t\downarrow0t↓0. Its associated generalized gradient is the support set

∂H(x)={g:⟨g,d⟩≤H0(x;d) for every direction d}.\partial H(x)=\{g:\langle g,d\rangle\le H^0(x;d)\text{ for every direction }d\}.∂H(x)={g:⟨g,d⟩≤H0(x;d) for every direction d}.

This is the definition used in Mifflin's report, not an identification assumed in advance with a hull of ordinary gradient limits. Proposition 1(c) supplies that identification under the paper's Lipschitz assumption. The ordinary one-sided directional derivative H′(x;d)H'(x;d)H′(x;d) is the limit of [H(x+td)−H(x)]/t[H(x+td)-H(x)]/t[H(x+td)−H(x)]/t for t↓0t\downarrow0t↓0, when that limit exists.

Mifflin calls HHH semismooth at xxx if it is Lipschitz on a ball about xxx and the scalar sequence ⟨gk,d⟩\langle g_k,d\rangle⟨gk​,d⟩ has exactly one accumulation point whenever tk>0t_k>0tk​>0 tends to zero, θk/tk→0\theta_k/t_k\to0θk​/tk​→0, and gk∈∂H(x+tkd+θk)g_k\in\partial H(x+t_kd+\theta_k)gk​∈∂H(x+tk​d+θk​). The quantification is over every direction and every such sequence. This pointwise condition is Definition 1 of the report, and its link to one-sided directional derivatives is Lemma 2.

To state the chain rule, form the set

G(x)=conv⁡{∑i=1mwigi:gi∈∂fi(x) for every i,w∈∂E(Y(x))}.G(x)=\operatorname{conv}\left\{\sum_{i=1}^{m}w_i g^i:g^i\in\partial f_i(x)\text{ for every }i,\quad w\in\partial E(Y(x))\right\}.G(x)=conv{i=1∑m​wi​gi:gi∈∂fi​(x) for every i,w∈∂E(Y(x))}.

The same www is used across all components. The sum is the action of the report's matrix [g1⋯gm][g^1\cdots g^m][g1⋯gm] on www.

Formalization targets

Generalized-gradient chain rule

Theorem 4 asserts that FFF is locally Lipschitz and that, at every point,

∂F(x)⊆G(x).\partial F(x)\subseteq G(x).∂F(x)⊆G(x).

This is an inclusion, not a general equality. The report gives an example immediately after Theorem 4 in which the inclusion is strict: two identical absolute-value components cancel under an outer difference, while G(0)G(0)G(0) remains larger than ∂F(0)\partial F(0)∂F(0).

Semismooth composition

The goal, Theorem 5, assumes the setting of Theorem 4. If each fif_ifi​ is semismooth at a selected xxx and EEE is semismooth at Y(x)Y(x)Y(x), then

E∘Y is semismooth at x.E\circ Y\text{ is semismooth at }x.E∘Y is semismooth at x.

The conclusion is pointwise. It does not assert semismoothness throughout Rn\mathbb R^nRn from hypotheses at one point. The milestone list contains the chain rule and the source's stated support results: Proposition 2, Lemma 1, Proposition 1(c) and (d), Lemma 2, and the claims (4.2) and (4.11)–(4.12) from the proofs.

What the results provide

Theorem 5 permits composite nonsmooth objectives to be treated within the same semismooth class as their components. Theorem 4 gives a concrete set built from component generalized gradients that contains the composite's generalized gradient. Together, they let later statements about a composite use first-order information from its stated ingredients, subject to the inclusion's possible strictness. These are results proved in Mifflin's report, not open mathematical conjectures.

This mission drafts machine-checkable statements of those known results and their definition layer. The local Lean modules compile with proof placeholders; this staging does not supply machine-checked proofs of the theorems. A complete development would formalize the known arguments or another proof of the same statements. The reusable output would include the support-set generalized gradient, sequence-based semismoothness, the nonsmooth mean value result, and the chain-rule inclusion, all with their source assumptions exposed.

Main difficulty

At a point where FFF is differentiable, the component functions fif_ifi​ need not be differentiable, and the outer function EEE need not be differentiable at Y(x)Y(x)Y(x). The ordinary smooth chain rule therefore cannot simply multiply ordinary gradients. The candidate G(x)G(x)G(x) is a convex set of combinations of generalized gradients; a single chosen combination does not in general describe all nearby limiting slopes. The report's strict-inclusion example also shows why replacing Theorem 4 by equality would be false. For semismoothness, the condition concerns every admissible sequence of generalized gradients near the point, so checking just one path or one gradient selection does not establish Theorem 5.

Formalization scope

The Lean domain is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) and the outer domain is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin m). The report's norm is the Euclidean norm and its pairing is the real inner product. An index of type Fin m represents the mmm components; m=0m=0m=0 is admitted, in which case the component space is a point and the composite is constant. A finite sum represents the column-matrix product. The generalized gradient is defined by all directional support inequalities, so Proposition 1(c) remains a theorem rather than becoming true by definition.

The generalized directional derivative is imported from the published definition matching the report's joint limit. Lean's real limsup has a default value for an unbounded quotient; Lipschitz hypotheses are carried wherever that operation is used. “Locally Lipschitz” is imported as Lipschitzness on every bounded subset, and the explicit constants of §2 use nonnegative reals, equivalent to the report's positive constants by enlarging them. The directional derivative is a relation asserting a limit, so no value is assigned when the limit fails. “Exactly one accumulation point” remains an existence-and-uniqueness assertion about cluster points. The report's tk↓0t_k\downarrow0tk​↓0 means positive convergence to zero, as its proof of Lemma 2 says explicitly. These choices exclude a vacuous formulation that only asks about one convenient sequence or gives a default directional value.

The scope includes the two local definition files and the cited theorem statements, including both conclusions of Theorem 4 and Lemma 2. Proof contributions would need finite-dimensional Lipschitz and differentiability infrastructure, limiting-gradient compactness, convex hull and separation facts, and sequence convergence facts. Results about the alternative Qi–Sun vector-valued semismoothness notion are outside this mission's definition layer.

Selected references

  • R. Mifflin, Semismooth and Semiconvex Functions in Constrained Optimization, IIASA Research Report RR-76-21, December 1976. Report PDF.
  • R. Mifflin, “Semismooth and Semiconvex Functions in Constrained Optimization,” SIAM Journal on Control and Optimization 15(6), 1977. DOI. This mission's page and theorem references are to the IIASA report.
13 thms2 active usersReviewed
Probability·Captain: mikedeng1

Discrete Analogues of Self-Decomposability and Stability 1: A p.g.f. Is Discrete Self-Decomposable iff P(z) = exp{−λ∫_z^1 (1−G(u))/(1−u) du}, iff It Is Infinitely Divisible with Nonincreasing r_nResearch Paper

Motivation

A probability distribution on the real line is self-decomposable (of class L) if its characteristic function satisfies φ(t)=φ(αt) φα(t)\varphi(t)=\varphi(\alpha t)\,\varphi_\alpha(t)φ(t)=φ(αt)φα​(t) for every α∈(0,1)\alpha\in(0,1)α∈(0,1), with φα\varphi_\alphaφα​ again a characteristic function. Equivalently, a random variable XXX can be written as X=dαX′+XαX\overset{d}{=}\alpha X'+X_\alphaX=dαX′+Xα​ with X′X'X′ a copy of XXX independent of XαX_\alphaXα​. Class L consists exactly of the limit laws of normalized sums of independent summands, and its members are infinitely divisible, absolutely continuous (when nondegenerate) and unimodal.

None of this transfers to counting variables: apart from X≡0X\equiv0X≡0, no random variable on N0={0,1,2,… }\mathbb N_0=\{0,1,2,\dots\}N0​={0,1,2,…} satisfies X=αX′+XαX=\alpha X'+X_\alphaX=αX′+Xα​, because αX′\alpha X'αX′ leaves the lattice. Steutel and van Harn (Memorandum COSOR 78-07, 1978; Ann. Probab. 7 (1979) 893–899) replaced scalar multiplication by binomial thinning, which keeps the variable integer valued. The resulting notion of discrete self-decomposability later became the basis of integer-valued autoregressive (INAR) time-series models (Al-Osh and Alzaid, 1987).

Timeline:

  • 1968: Feller, An Introduction to Probability Theory and Its Applications, vol. 1, 3rd ed., characterizes the infinitely divisible distributions on N0\mathbb N_0N0​ as the compound Poisson distributions.
  • 1971: Steutel, On the zeros of infinitely divisible densities (Ann. Math. Statist. 42), and 1977: van Harn and Steutel, Generalized renewal sequences and infinitely divisible lattice distributions (Stoch. Proc. Appl. 5), give the recursive criterion (n+1)pn+1=∑kpkrn−k(n+1)p_{n+1}=\sum_k p_k r_{n-k}(n+1)pn+1​=∑k​pk​rn−k​ with rn≥0r_n\ge0rn​≥0.
  • 1978–1979: Steutel and van Harn introduce discrete self-decomposability and discrete stability and prove the canonical form (Theorem 2.2, the goal of this mission), unimodality, and the characterization of the discrete stable laws.

Setting

A distribution on N0\mathbb N_0N0​ is a sequence pn≥0p_n\ge0pn​≥0 with ∑npn=1\sum_n p_n=1∑n​pn​=1; its probability generating function (p.g.f.) is P(z)=∑n≥0pnznP(z)=\sum_{n\ge0}p_nz^nP(z)=∑n≥0​pn​zn. The generating function of a sequence (gn)(g_n)(gn​) is written GGG.

The α\alphaα-thinning of a variable XXX with p.g.f. PPP is α∘X=∑j=1XNj\alpha\circ X=\sum_{j=1}^{X}N_jα∘X=∑j=1X​Nj​ with independent Bernoulli(α\alphaα) variables NjN_jNj​; its p.g.f. is P(1−α+αz)P(1-\alpha+\alpha z)P(1−α+αz). A distribution with p.g.f. PPP is discrete self-decomposable (Definition 2.1) if for every α∈(0,1)\alpha\in(0,1)α∈(0,1)

P(z)=P(1−α+αz) Pα(z)(∣z∣≤1)P(z)=P(1-\alpha+\alpha z)\,P_\alpha(z)\qquad(|z|\le1)P(z)=P(1−α+αz)Pα​(z)(∣z∣≤1)

with PαP_\alphaPα​ a p.g.f.; in variables, X=dα∘X′+XαX\overset{d}{=}\alpha\circ X'+X_\alphaX=dα∘X′+Xα​.

A distribution is infinitely divisible if for every n≥1n\ge1n≥1 its p.g.f. is the nnn-th power of a p.g.f. When p0>0p_0>0p0​>0, its canonical sequence (rn)(r_n)(rn​) is the unique solution of

(n+1) pn+1=∑k=0npk rn−k(n∈N0).(n+1)\,p_{n+1}=\sum_{k=0}^{n}p_k\,r_{n-k}\qquad(n\in\mathbb N_0).(n+1)pn+1​=k=0∑n​pk​rn−k​(n∈N0​).

Throughout §2 the paper assumes 0<p0<10<p_0<10<p0​<1.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2.2

For a distribution (pn)(p_n)(pn​) with 0<p0<10<p_0<10<p0​<1:

(pn) discrete self-dec  ⟺  P(z)=exp⁡{−λ∫z11−G(u)1−u du}(0≤z<1)(p_n)\ \text{discrete self-dec}\iff P(z)=\exp\Big\{-\lambda\int_z^1\frac{1-G(u)}{1-u}\,du\Big\}\quad(0\le z<1)(pn​) discrete self-dec⟺P(z)=exp{−λ∫z1​1−u1−G(u)​du}(0≤z<1)

for some λ>0\lambda>0λ>0 and some p.g.f. GGG of a distribution with G(0)=0G(0)=0G(0)=0, the pair (λ,G)(\lambda,G)(λ,G) being unique; and

(pn) discrete self-dec  ⟺  (pn) inf div and (rn) nonincreasing.(p_n)\ \text{discrete self-dec}\iff (p_n)\ \text{inf div and } (r_n)\ \text{nonincreasing}.(pn​) discrete self-dec⟺(pn​) inf div and (rn​) nonincreasing.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 1.1: lim⁡x↑1(1−x)P′(x)=0\lim_{x\uparrow1}(1-x)P'(x)=0limx↑1​(1−x)P′(x)=0 for every p.g.f.
  2. Lemma 1.2: for 0<p0<10<p_0<10<p0​<1, PPP is infinitely divisible iff P(z)=exp⁡{λ(G(z)−1)}P(z)=\exp\{\lambda(G(z)-1)\}P(z)=exp{λ(G(z)−1)} (unique λ>0\lambda>0λ>0, G(0)=0G(0)=0G(0)=0), iff P(z)=exp⁡{−∫z1R(u) du}P(z)=\exp\{-\int_z^1R(u)\,du\}P(z)=exp{−∫z1​R(u)du} with R=∑rnunR=\sum r_nu^nR=∑rn​un, rn≥0r_n\ge0rn​≥0 (necessarily ∑rn/(n+1)<∞\sum r_n/(n+1)<\infty∑rn​/(n+1)<∞), iff the canonical sequence is nonnegative.
  3. (2.6): if PPP is discrete self-decomposable, exp⁡{−r(1−z)P′(z)/P(z)}\exp\{-r(1-z)P'(z)/P(z)\}exp{−r(1−z)P′(z)/P(z)} is a p.g.f. for every r>0r>0r>0.
  4. (2.7)–(2.8): the form (2.4) gives P′/P=λ(1−G)/(1−z)P'/P=\lambda(1-G)/(1-z)P′/P=λ(1−G)/(1−z), infinite divisibility, and rn=λ∑j>ngjr_n=\lambda\sum_{j>n}g_jrn​=λ∑j>n​gj​, nonincreasing.
  5. The converse (pp. 3–4): if PPP is infinitely divisible with nonincreasing rnr_nrn​, then P(z)/P(1−α+αz)P(z)/P(1-\alpha+\alpha z)P(z)/P(1−α+αz) is an infinitely divisible p.g.f. for each α∈(0,1)\alpha\in(0,1)α∈(0,1).

Significance

Theorem 2.2 reduces discrete self-decomposability, a condition quantified over all α∈(0,1)\alpha\in(0,1)α∈(0,1) and over unknown factors PαP_\alphaPα​, to a single monotonicity condition on the sequence (rn)(r_n)(rn​) computed recursively from (pn)(p_n)(pn​). It is the entry point of the rest of the paper: combined with Theorem 2.3 it gives unimodality of every discrete self-decomposable distribution (Corollary 2.4), and §3 shows that discrete stable distributions are discrete self-decomposable. In time-series modelling it identifies the marginals that a stationary INAR(1) process Xt=α∘Xt−1+εtX_t=\alpha\circ X_{t-1}+\varepsilon_tXt​=α∘Xt−1​+εt​ can have for every α∈(0,1)\alpha\in(0,1)α∈(0,1).

The result has been proved since 1979; to our knowledge none of it is formalized in any proof assistant, and Mathlib has neither probability generating functions on N0\mathbb N_0N0​ nor infinite divisibility. The mission produces a machine-checked version of the canonical form together with the compound-Poisson characterization of infinite divisibility on N0\mathbb N_0N0​ (Lemma 1.2), which the paper only cites.

Difficulty

The forward direction is not a consequence of (2.1) for any single α\alphaα: one factorization P(z)=P(1−α+αz)Pα(z)P(z)=P(1-\alpha+\alpha z)P_\alpha(z)P(z)=P(1−α+αz)Pα​(z) constrains PPP very little, and the information sits in the whole family of factors PαP_\alphaPα​, α∈(0,1)\alpha\in(0,1)α∈(0,1), which are not given explicitly. Turning that family into a statement about PPP needs a passage to a limit of p.g.f.'s, and the fact that such a limit is again a p.g.f. (the continuity theorem for p.g.f.'s, Feller vol. 1, p. 280) is not in Mathlib. The paper does not prove Lemma 1.2 either; it cites Feller and Steutel. For the converse, nonnegativity of the canonical sequence is not enough: the obvious attempt to show that P(z)/P(1−α+αz)P(z)/P(1-\alpha+\alpha z)P(z)/P(1−α+αz) has nonnegative coefficients fails for infinitely divisible PPP in general, and the monotonicity of rnr_nrn​ is exactly what is needed. Finally, every identity is stated between real functions on [0,1][0,1][0,1], and passing to identities between coefficients requires the uniqueness of power-series coefficients on a real interval.

Formalization scope

  • A distribution is p : ℕ → ℝ with ∀ n, 0 ≤ p n and HasSum p 1; the p.g.f. is the real function pgf p z = ∑' n, p n * z ^ n. All identities between p.g.f.'s are required for real z∈[0,1]z\in[0,1]z∈[0,1] (or [0,1)[0,1)[0,1) for (1.4), (2.4), (2.6), (2.7)), not for complex ∣z∣≤1|z|\le1∣z∣≤1; p.g.f.'s agreeing on [0,1][0,1][0,1] have equal coefficients, so this is equivalent. P′P'P′ is Lean's deriv of pgf p.
  • Infinite divisibility follows Feller: for every n≥1n\ge1n≥1 an nnn-th root that is the p.g.f. of a distribution on N0\mathbb N_0N0​. It is not defined as rn≥0r_n\ge0rn​≥0 or as the form (1.3); those are Lemma 1.2.
  • The canonical sequence is defined by the recursion rn=((n+1)pn+1−∑k=1npkrn−k)/p0r_n=((n+1)p_{n+1}-\sum_{k=1}^np_kr_{n-k})/p_0rn​=((n+1)pn+1​−∑k=1n​pk​rn−k​)/p0​; every statement using it assumes p0>0p_0>0p0​>0.
  • The standing assumption 0<p0<10<p_0<10<p0​<1 of §2 is a hypothesis of Theorem 2.2 and of the §2 milestones.
  • The improper integrals in (1.4) and (2.4) carry an explicit integrability clause on (z,1)(z,1)(z,1), and the series RRR an explicit convergence clause on [0,1)[0,1)[0,1). Lean's integral of a non-integrable function, and the sum of a divergent series, are 000; without these clauses the forms (1.4) and (2.4) could hold vacuously, so a formalization that drops them does not state the theorem.
  • Uniqueness of (λ,G)(\lambda,G)(λ,G) in (1.3) and (2.4) is part of the statements.

Reusable beyond this mission: the p.g.f. and infinite-divisibility vocabulary, Lemma 1.2 (compound Poisson characterization), and Lemma 1.1. A continuity theorem for p.g.f.'s on N0\mathbb N_0N0​, and the uniqueness of power-series coefficients from values on [0,1)[0,1)[0,1), are welcome as independent contributions.

Selected references

  • F. W. Steutel, K. van Harn, Discrete analogues of self-decomposability and stability, Memorandum COSOR 78-07, Technische Hogeschool Eindhoven, 1978. https://pure.tue.nl/ws/files/1719387/340666.pdf — published as Ann. Probab. 7(5) (1979) 893–899. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176994950
  • W. Feller, An Introduction to Probability Theory and Its Applications, vol. 1, 3rd ed., Wiley, New York, 1968 (XII.2; continuity theorem p. 280).
  • F. W. Steutel, On the zeros of infinitely divisible densities, Ann. Math. Statist. 42 (1971) 812–815.
  • K. van Harn, F. W. Steutel, Generalized renewal sequences and infinitely divisible lattice distributions, Stochastic Process. Appl. 5 (1977) 47–55.
  • M. A. Al-Osh, A. A. Alzaid, First-order integer-valued autoregressive (INAR(1)) process, J. Time Series Anal. 8 (1987) 261–275. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1467-9892.1987.tb00438.x
9 thms2 active usersReviewed
Optimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Semismooth and Semiconvex Functions in Constrained Optimization I: The Pointwise Maximum or Minimum over a Compact Family of Continuously Differentiable Functions Is SemismoothResearch Paper

Motivation

Many objective functions in engineering design, Chebyshev approximation and game-theoretic planning are extremal-valued: they are the pointwise maximum or minimum of a family of smooth functions, E(x)=max⁡u∈Uf(x,u)E(x)=\max_{u\in U} f(x,u)E(x)=maxu∈U​f(x,u). Such a function is typically not differentiable at points where two or more members of the family are active, so gradient methods do not apply directly. In 1976 R. Mifflin introduced the class of semismooth functions to identify which nondifferentiable functions can be minimized by bundle-type and line-search methods whose convergence relies only on generalized gradients (Mifflin, IIASA RR-76-21; journal version SIAM J. Control Optim. 15 (1977), doi:10.1137/0315061). For that class to be useful it must contain the functions that actually occur in practice. §3 of the report shows that it contains min–max objectives, which is the content of this mission.

Background: F. H. Clarke defined the generalized gradient of a locally Lipschitz function and computed it for max functions (Clarke, Trans. AMS 205 (1975), Theorem 2.1). A. Feuer's Columbia dissertation (1974) proved the formulas of Theorem 1 below under stronger assumptions and a result close to semismoothness, from which Mifflin's proof of Theorem 2 is adapted (report, Remark, p. 8). Mifflin's notion of semismoothness was later extended to vector-valued maps by Qi and Sun (1993), where it became the standard hypothesis for superlinear convergence of nonsmooth Newton methods.

Setting

Let Rn\mathbb R^nRn carry the Euclidean inner product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩ and norm ∣⋅∣|\cdot|∣⋅∣, and let F:Rn→RF:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb RF:Rn→R. FFF is Lipschitz on a set BBB if ∣F(y)−F(z)∣≤K∣y−z∣|F(y)-F(z)|\le K|y-z|∣F(y)−F(z)∣≤K∣y−z∣ for all y,z∈By,z\in By,z∈B. Clarke's generalized directional derivative is

F0(x;d)=lim sup⁡h→0, t↓0F(x+h+td)−F(x+h)t,F^0(x;d)=\limsup_{h\to 0,\ t\downarrow 0}\frac{F(x+h+td)-F(x+h)}{t},F0(x;d)=h→0, t↓0limsup​tF(x+h+td)−F(x+h)​,

and the generalized gradient is ∂F(x)={g:⟨g,d⟩≤F0(x;d) ∀d}\partial F(x)=\{g:\langle g,d\rangle\le F^0(x;d)\ \forall d\}∂F(x)={g:⟨g,d⟩≤F0(x;d) ∀d}. When lim⁡t↓0[F(x+td)−F(x)]/t\lim_{t\downarrow 0}[F(x+td)-F(x)]/tlimt↓0​[F(x+td)−F(x)]/t exists it is the directional derivative F′(x;d)F'(x;d)F′(x;d); FFF is quasidifferentiable at xxx if F′(x;d)F'(x;d)F′(x;d) exists and equals F0(x;d)F^0(x;d)F0(x;d) for all ddd.

FFF is semismooth at xxx (Definition 1) if it is Lipschitz on a ball about xxx and, for each ddd and all sequences tk↓0t_k\downarrow 0tk​↓0, θk\theta_kθk​ with θk/tk→0\theta_k/t_k\to 0θk​/tk​→0, and gk∈∂F(x+tkd+θk)g_k\in\partial F(x+t_kd+\theta_k)gk​∈∂F(x+tk​d+θk​), the real sequence ⟨gk,d⟩\langle g_k,d\rangle⟨gk​,d⟩ has exactly one accumulation point. FFF is semiconvex at xxx with respect to XXX (Definition 2) if it is Lipschitz on a ball about xxx, quasidifferentiable at xxx, and x+d∈Xx+d\in Xx+d∈X, F′(x;d)≥0F'(x;d)\ge 0F′(x;d)≥0 imply F(x+d)≥F(x)F(x+d)\ge F(x)F(x+d)≥F(x).

In §3, B⊆RnB\subseteq\mathbb R^nB⊆Rn is open, TTT is a topological space, U⊆TU\subseteq TU⊆T is sequentially compact, f:Rn×T→Rf:\mathbb R^n\times T\to\mathbb Rf:Rn×T→R, and E:Rn→RE:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb RE:Rn→R satisfies either (d) E(x)=max⁡u∈Uf(x,u)E(x)=\max_{u\in U}f(x,u)E(x)=maxu∈U​f(x,u) on BBB or (d′) E(x)=min⁡u∈Uf(x,u)E(x)=\min_{u\in U}f(x,u)E(x)=minu∈U​f(x,u) on BBB. The active set is A(x)={u∈U:E(x)=f(x,u)}A(x)=\{u\in U:E(x)=f(x,u)\}A(x)={u∈U:E(x)=f(x,u)}, and ∂xf(x,u)\partial_x f(x,u)∂x​f(x,u) is the generalized gradient of f(⋅,u)f(\cdot,u)f(⋅,u) at xxx. Hypotheses (a)–(c) ask that fff be continuous on B×UB\times UB×U, Lipschitz in xxx uniformly in uuu, and that ∂xf\partial_x f∂x​f be upper semicontinuous on B×UB\times UB×U; (e) and (e′) ask that fx′(x,u;d)f'_x(x,u;d)fx′​(x,u;d) exist and equal fx0(x,u;d)f^0_x(x,u;d)fx0​(x,u;d), respectively −fx0(x,u;−d)-f^0_x(x,u;-d)−fx0​(x,u;−d).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2 (p. 8)

If (a) holds, EEE has the max form (d) or the min form (d′), f(⋅,u)f(\cdot,u)f(⋅,u) is differentiable on BBB for each u∈Uu\in Uu∈U, and ∇xf\nabla_x f∇x​f is continuous and bounded on B×UB\times UB×U, then

E is semismooth on B.E\ \text{is semismooth on } B.E is semismooth on B.

Milestones

  • Proposition 1(a), (b), (d) (p. 3): ∂F(x)\partial F(x)∂F(x) is nonempty, convex and compact; F0(x;d)=max⁡{⟨g,d⟩:g∈∂F(x)}F^0(x;d)=\max\{\langle g,d\rangle:g\in\partial F(x)\}F0(x;d)=max{⟨g,d⟩:g∈∂F(x)}; ∂F\partial F∂F is bounded by the Lipschitz constant and upper semicontinuous.
  • Theorem 1 (pp. 7–8), max and min forms: EEE is Lipschitz on BBB,
∂E(x)=conv⁡⋃u∈A(x)∂xf(x,u),E′(x;d)=E0(x;d)=max⁡{⟨g,d⟩:g∈∂xf(x,u), u∈A(x)}\partial E(x)=\operatorname{conv}\bigcup_{u\in A(x)}\partial_x f(x,u),\qquad E'(x;d)=E^0(x;d)=\max\{\langle g,d\rangle:g\in\partial_x f(x,u),\ u\in A(x)\}∂E(x)=convu∈A(x)⋃​∂x​f(x,u),E′(x;d)=E0(x;d)=max{⟨g,d⟩:g∈∂x​f(x,u), u∈A(x)}

in the max form, and E′(x;d)=−E0(x;−d)=min⁡{⋯ }E'(x;d)=-E^0(x;-d)=\min\{\cdots\}E′(x;d)=−E0(x;−d)=min{⋯} in the min form.

  • Two claims from the proof of Theorem 2 (p. 8): the smoothness assumption yields (b), (c), (e), (e′) and ∂xf={∇xf}\partial_x f=\{\nabla_x f\}∂x​f={∇x​f}; and lim sup⁡k⟨gk,d⟩≤E′(x;d)\limsup_k\langle g_k,d\rangle\le E'(x;d)limsupk​⟨gk​,d⟩≤E′(x;d).
  • Theorem 3 (p. 10): a max function of functions semiconvex at xxx is semiconvex at xxx.
  • Propositions 3 and 4 (pp. 5–6): convex, concave and continuously differentiable functions are semismooth, with the corresponding semiconvexity and quasidifferentiability statements.

Significance

Theorem 2 places every min–max objective with continuously differentiable data inside the class on which Mifflin's descent algorithms, and the bundle methods that followed them, are proved to converge. Theorem 1 is the generalized-gradient form of Danskin's theorem, the standard tool for computing subgradients of max functions. Theorem 3 shows that semiconvexity, unlike pseudoconvexity, survives pointwise maximization, which is what the sufficient optimality results of §5 of the report need.

All of these results are proved in the report and in the literature since 1977; none is open. As far as is known, none of them has a machine-checked proof. Mathlib has Fréchet derivatives and convex analysis but no Clarke generalized gradient calculus, no semismoothness and no Danskin-type theorem. A formalization produces those pieces as reusable infrastructure, and checks the report's statements under exactly stated hypotheses. One printed claim already needs a correction (see Formalization scope).

Difficulty

Lipschitz continuity of EEE and the inequality lim sup⁡k⟨gk,d⟩≤E′(x;d)\limsup_k\langle g_k,d\rangle\le E'(x;d)limsupk​⟨gk​,d⟩≤E′(x;d) follow from Theorem 1 and the upper semicontinuity of ∂E\partial E∂E. The difficulty is the matching lower bound: semismoothness asks that the slopes ⟨gk,d⟩\langle g_k,d\rangle⟨gk​,d⟩ along an arbitrary sequence xk=x+tkd+θkx_k=x+t_kd+\theta_kxk​=x+tk​d+θk​, with arbitrary gk∈∂E(xk)g_k\in\partial E(x_k)gk​∈∂E(xk​), not accumulate strictly below E′(x;d)E'(x;d)E′(x;d). A generalized gradient of EEE at xkx_kxk​ is only a convex combination of gradients of the active functions at xkx_kxk​, and the active set can change discontinuously along the sequence. Upper semicontinuity of ∂E\partial E∂E alone does not prevent this; the function x2sin⁡(1/x)x^2\sin(1/x)x2sin(1/x) (p. 6) is Lipschitz and has an upper semicontinuous ∂F\partial F∂F but is not semismooth at 000. The argument has to use the continuity of ∇xf\nabla_x f∇x​f jointly in (x,u)(x,u)(x,u) and the compactness of UUU. Theorem 1 itself needs a mean value theorem for Lipschitz functions and a compactness argument over the active set, neither of which is in Mathlib in this form.

Formalization scope

Rn\mathbb R^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n). F0F^0F0 is the published ClarkeGradients.Shared.genDirDeriv, a real limsup; every statement assumes the Lipschitz hypothesis of the page at the points where F0F^0F0 or ∂F\partial F∂F is used, so that this limsup is the true value. ∂F\partial F∂F is the support-set definition of the page, not Clarke's convex hull of gradient limits; the two coincide by Proposition 1(c), which is not assumed. F′(x;d)F'(x;d)F′(x;d) is a relation (HasDirDeriv), so "F′(x;d)≥0F'(x;d)\ge 0F′(x;d)≥0" means "exists and is nonnegative". "Exactly one accumulation point" is a unique cluster point, not convergence. "tk↓0t_k\downarrow 0tk​↓0" is read as "positive and tending to 000", as the report reads it in the proof of Lemma 2. "max" and "min" are attained extrema (IsGreatest, IsLeast), never suprema with default values.

EEE is a given function constrained by (d) or (d′), not a supremum; this rules out the trivializing formalization in which EEE is defined as ⨆ u ∈ U, f x u and takes the default value 000 for an empty or unbounded family. (d) and (d′) force U≠∅U\neq\emptysetU=∅. The page's "for each x∈Bx\in Bx∈B either (d) and (e) or (d′) and (e′)" is read as one form on all of BBB, as the proof of Theorem 2 treats it, and Theorem 1 is stated as two items. Hypothesis (c) is the sequential accumulation-point form in which Proposition 1(d) glosses upper semicontinuity.

The goal does not assume (b), (c), (e), (e′) or convexity of BBB; the report derives the first four from smoothness. The report claims (b) on all of BBB, which fails for non-convex open BBB (a bounded gradient gives a uniform Lipschitz constant only on convex sets). The corresponding milestone states (b) on balls contained in BBB, which is all the proof needs.

The development needs Clarke's calculus for Lipschitz functions on Rn\mathbb R^nRn (Propositions 1 and 2, a Lebourg mean value theorem), a Danskin-type theorem, and the regularity of C1C^1C1 functions. These are reusable well beyond this mission; a companion mission of the series covers Propositions 1(c), 2 and the chain rule. Contributions are welcome on any milestone, including alternative proofs of Theorem 1.

Selected references

  • R. Mifflin, Semismooth and semiconvex functions in constrained optimization, IIASA Research Report RR-76-21, December 1976. https://pure.iiasa.ac.at/id/eprint/524/ (journal version: SIAM J. Control Optim. 15(6) (1977) 959–972, https://doi.org/10.1137/0315061).
  • F. H. Clarke, Generalized gradients and applications, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 205 (1975) 247–262. https://doi.org/10.1090/S0002-9947-1975-0367131-6
  • A. Feuer, An Implementable Mathematical Programming Algorithm for Admissible Fundamental Functions, Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Mathematics, Columbia University, 1974.
  • G. Lebourg, Valeur moyenne pour gradient généralisé, C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris Sér. A 281 (1975) 795–797.
  • L. Qi and J. Sun, A nonsmooth version of Newton's method, Math. Programming 58 (1993) 353–367. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01581275
16 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Extrapolated Proximal Subgradient Algorithms for Nonconvex and Nonsmooth Fractional Programs 3: Enhanced e-PSG Cluster Points Are Strong Lifted Stationary Points for Max-Type DenominatorsResearch Paper

Motivation

Fractional programs minimize a ratio f(x)/g(x)f(x)/g(x)f(x)/g(x) over a constraint set. They arise whenever a quantity has to be normalized: the scale-invariant sparse recovery model minimizes ∥x∥1/∥x∥2\|x\|_1/\|x\|_2∥x∥1​/∥x∥2​ (Rahimi, Wang, Dong, Lou 2019), robust Sharpe-ratio portfolio selection maximizes a mean-to-worst-case-risk ratio, and generalized eigenvalue problems minimize Rayleigh quotients. Classical methods such as Dinkelbach's algorithm assume convex fff and concave ggg; many modern instances have neither.

Boţ, Dao and Li (arXiv:2003.04124, Math. Oper. Res. 2022) study the nonconvex nonsmooth case in which the numerator is a smooth convex part plus a lower semicontinuous part and the denominator is weakly convex on the constraint set. Their basic method, the extrapolated proximal subgradient (e-PSG) algorithm, converges subsequentially to lifted stationary points. When the denominator is a maximum of finitely many smooth functions, a lifted stationary point may be spurious: it only requires one element of the subdifferential of ggg to balance the numerator. Section 6 of the paper proposes an enhanced algorithm, in the spirit of the enhanced DC algorithm of Pang, Razaviyayn, Alvarado 2017, whose cluster points satisfy the stronger condition for all such elements. This mission formalizes that result.

Setting

HHH is a finite-dimensional real Hilbert space, S⊆HS\subseteq HS⊆H is nonempty, closed and convex, and the problem is

min⁡x∈S f(x)g(x).(P)\min_{x\in S}\ \frac{f(x)}{g(x)} .\qquad (P)x∈Smin​ g(x)f(x)​.(P)
  • Numerator (Assumption 1). f=fs+fnf=f^{\mathfrak s}+f^{\mathfrak n}f=fs+fn, where fs:H→Rf^{\mathfrak s}:H\to\mathbb Rfs:H→R is convex and continuously differentiable with an ℓ\ellℓ-Lipschitz gradient, fn:H→(−∞,+∞]f^{\mathfrak n}:H\to(-\infty,+\infty]fn:H→(−∞,+∞] is proper and lower semicontinuous, S∩dom⁡f≠∅S\cap\operatorname{dom}f\neq\emptysetS∩domf=∅, and f≥0f\ge0f≥0 on S∩dom⁡fS\cap\operatorname{dom}fS∩domf.
  • Denominator (Assumption 2′). g=max⁡{gi:1≤i≤p}g=\max\{g_i:1\le i\le p\}g=max{gi​:1≤i≤p}, each gig_igi​ continuously differentiable on an open set containing SSS and weakly convex on SSS with modulus β≥0\beta\ge0β≥0, meaning gi+β2∥⋅∥2g_i+\frac\beta2\|\cdot\|^2gi​+2β​∥⋅∥2 is convex on SSS. The boundedness condition (BC) holds: m≤g≤Mm\le g\le Mm≤g≤M on S∩dom⁡fS\cap\operatorname{dom}fS∩domf for some m,M>0m,M>0m,M>0.
  • Active sets. Iε(x)={i:gi(x)≥g(x)−ε}I_\varepsilon(x)=\{i: g_i(x)\ge g(x)-\varepsilon\}Iε​(x)={i:gi​(x)≥g(x)−ε}; I0(x)I_0(x)I0​(x) is the set of indices attaining the maximum.
  • Subdifferentials. ∂L\partial_L∂L​ is the limiting (Mordukhovich) subdifferential, and ιS\iota_SιS​ is the indicator of SSS.
  • Strong lifted stationarity (Definition 3.1(iii)). xˉ∈S\bar x\in Sxˉ∈S is a strong lifted stationary point if f(xˉ) ∂Lg(xˉ)⊆g(xˉ) ∂L(f+ιS)(xˉ)f(\bar x)\,\partial_L g(\bar x)\subseteq g(\bar x)\,\partial_L(f+\iota_S)(\bar x)f(xˉ)∂L​g(xˉ)⊆g(xˉ)∂L​(f+ιS​)(xˉ).

Algorithm 2 starts from x−1=x0∈S∩dom⁡fx_{-1}=x_0\in S\cap\operatorname{dom}fx−1​=x0​∈S∩domf. At step nnn it sets θn=f(xn)/g(xn)\theta_n=f(x_n)/g(x_n)θn​=f(xn​)/g(xn​), picks a step size τn\tau_nτn​ and extrapolation weights κn∈[0,κˉ]\kappa_n\in[0,\bar\kappa]κn​∈[0,κˉ], μn∈[0,μˉτn]\mu_n\in[0,\bar\mu\tau_n]μn​∈[0,μˉ​τn​], and forms un=xn+κn(xn−xn−1)u_n=x_n+\kappa_n(x_n-x_{n-1})un​=xn​+κn​(xn​−xn−1​) and vn=xn+μn(xn−xn−1)v_n=x_n+\mu_n(x_n-x_{n-1})vn​=xn​+μn​(xn​−xn−1​). For every i∈Iε(xn)i\in I_\varepsilon(x_n)i∈Iε​(xn​) it computes a proximal candidate

wni∈argmin⁡x∈S(fn(x)+⟨∇fs(un),x⟩+12τn∥x−vn−τnθn∇gi(xn)∥2+ℓ2∥x−un∥2)w_n^{i}\in\operatorname*{argmin}_{x\in S}\Big(f^{\mathfrak n}(x)+\langle\nabla f^{\mathfrak s}(u_n),x\rangle+\tfrac1{2\tau_n}\|x-v_n-\tau_n\theta_n\nabla g_i(x_n)\|^2+\tfrac\ell2\|x-u_n\|^2\Big)wni​∈x∈Sargmin​(fn(x)+⟨∇fs(un​),x⟩+2τn​1​∥x−vn​−τn​θn​∇gi​(xn​)∥2+2ℓ​∥x−un​∥2)

(up to constants), and keeps as xn+1x_{n+1}xn+1​ the candidate minimizing the merit value f(w)−θng(w)+12(1−βζτn−MμnmMτn)∥w−xn∥2f(w)-\theta_n g(w)+\frac12\big(\frac{1-\sqrt\beta\zeta}{\tau_n}-\frac{M\mu_n}{\sqrt{mM}\tau_n}\big)\|w-x_n\|^2f(w)−θn​g(w)+21​(τn​1−β​ζ​−mM​τn​Mμn​​)∥w−xn​∥2.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6.1(iii)

Assume the sublevel set S0={x∈S:f(x)/g(x)≤f(x0)/g(x0)}S_0=\{x\in S: f(x)/g(x)\le f(x_0)/g(x_0)\}S0​={x∈S:f(x)/g(x)≤f(x0​)/g(x0​)} is bounded and lim inf⁡nτn=τˉ>0\liminf_n\tau_n=\bar\tau>0liminfn​τn​=τˉ>0. Then every cluster point xˉ\bar xxˉ of (xn)(x_n)(xn​) satisfies xˉ∈S∩dom⁡f\bar x\in S\cap\operatorname{dom}fxˉ∈S∩domf, f(xn)/g(xn)→f(xˉ)/g(xˉ)f(x_n)/g(x_n)\to f(\bar x)/g(\bar x)f(xn​)/g(xn​)→f(xˉ)/g(xˉ),

f(xˉ)g(xˉ)⋃i∈I0(xˉ)∇gi(xˉ)⊆∂L(f+ιS)(xˉ),(28)\frac{f(\bar x)}{g(\bar x)}\bigcup_{i\in I_0(\bar x)}\nabla g_i(\bar x)\subseteq\partial_L(f+\iota_S)(\bar x),\qquad(28)g(xˉ)f(xˉ)​i∈I0​(xˉ)⋃​∇gi​(xˉ)⊆∂L​(f+ιS​)(xˉ),(28)

and, if fff is weakly convex on SSS, xˉ\bar xxˉ is a strong lifted stationary point of (P).

Milestones, in proof order

  1. Lemma 4.4 (descent lemma; already proved on the platform) and Lemma 4.3 (subgradient inequality for weakly convex functions).
  2. Inequality (32): the merit value of xn+1x_{n+1}xn+1​ is at most that of any candidate, which is bounded by a model of fff at any x∈Sx\in Sx∈S.
  3. The one-step decrease of f(xn)/g(xn)f(x_n)/g(x_n)f(xn​)/g(xn​) that follows from (32).
  4. Theorem 6.1(i): xn∈S∩dom⁡fx_n\in S\cap\operatorname{dom}fxn​∈S∩domf, and the sequence Fn=f(xn)/g(xn)+(ℓκˉ22m+μˉ2mM)∥xn−xn−1∥2F_n=f(x_n)/g(x_n)+\big(\frac{\ell\bar\kappa^2}{2m}+\frac{\bar\mu}{2\sqrt{mM}}\big)\|x_n-x_{n-1}\|^2Fn​=f(xn​)/g(xn​)+(2mℓκˉ2​+2mM​μˉ​​)∥xn​−xn−1​∥2 of (27) is nonincreasing and convergent.
  5. Theorem 6.1(ii): the iterates are bounded and ∑n∥xn+1−xn∥2<+∞\sum_n\|x_{n+1}-x_n\|^2<+\infty∑n​∥xn+1​−xn​∥2<+∞.
  6. The limit inequality at a cluster point, and inclusion (34) (= (28)).
  7. Lemma 2.2(i): ∂L(h+ιS)\partial_L(h+\iota_S)∂L​(h+ιS​) is closed and convex for weakly convex hhh.

Significance

For max-type denominators the result separates the enhanced algorithm from the basic one. A lifted stationary point only needs 0∈g(xˉ)∂L(f+ιS)(xˉ)−f(xˉ)∂Lg(xˉ)0\in g(\bar x)\partial_L(f+\iota_S)(\bar x)-f(\bar x)\partial_L g(\bar x)0∈g(xˉ)∂L​(f+ιS​)(xˉ)−f(xˉ)∂L​g(xˉ). The paper's Example 3.3 (min⁡∣x∣≤1(x2+1)/(∣x∣+1)\min_{|x|\le1}(x^2+1)/(|x|+1)min∣x∣≤1​(x2+1)/(∣x∣+1)) has the lifted stationary point 000, which is not a local minimizer; the strong lifted stationary points of that example are exactly its minimizers. Lemma 3.4 of the paper identifies strong lifted stationarity with d-stationarity of f−f(xˉ)g(xˉ)gf-\frac{f(\bar x)}{g(\bar x)}gf−g(xˉ)f(xˉ)​g on SSS when f+ιSf+\iota_Sf+ιS​ and ggg are weakly convex. This is the sharpest first-order notion used for DC-type programs.

The theorem is proved in the paper (pp. 22–24). No machine-checked version of it, of the e-PSG analysis, or of lifted stationarity exists on the platform. Formalizing it checks the step-size bookkeeping that the printed algorithm gets wrong (see below). It also produces reusable statements about weakly convex functions and the limiting subdifferential of h+ιSh+\iota_Sh+ιS​.

Difficulty

The descent part follows the template of the basic e-PSG analysis, but the merit criterion couples the candidate selection with the extrapolation: the coefficient 1−βζτn−MμnmMτn\frac{1-\sqrt\beta\zeta}{\tau_n}-\frac{M\mu_n}{\sqrt{mM}\tau_n}τn​1−β​ζ​−mM​τn​Mμn​​ has to stay positive, and the cross term ⟨w−xn,xn−xn−1⟩\langle w-x_n,x_n-x_{n-1}\rangle⟨w−xn​,xn​−xn−1​⟩ has to be split with the specific weight m/M\sqrt{m/M}m/M​ for the constants of (27) to close.

The limit step is the main obstacle. The algorithm works with Iε(xn)I_\varepsilon(x_n)Iε​(xn​), but the conclusion concerns I0(xˉ)I_0(\bar x)I0​(xˉ) at a limit point. One must show that every index active at xˉ\bar xxˉ was a candidate along the subsequence. One must also show that f(xkn+1)→f(xˉ)f(x_{k_n+1})\to f(\bar x)f(xkn​+1​)→f(xˉ) although fff is only lower semicontinuous. The naive approach, passing to the limit in the optimality condition of a single subproblem, gives one element of ∂Lg(xˉ)\partial_L g(\bar x)∂L​g(xˉ) only, which is lifted stationarity again. The final step needs the limiting subdifferential of a finite max of C1C^1C1 functions to be the convex hull of the active gradients. The paper uses this fact without proof, and Mathlib does not provide it for ∂L\partial_L∂L​.

Formalization scope

  • Carrier. HHH is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin N). Functions into (−∞,+∞](-\infty,+\infty](−∞,+∞] are EReal-valued. ∂L\partial_L∂L​ is the published NonconvexSplitting.Shared.LimitingSubdiff, and properness is IsProperFn.
  • Indices and the max. Indices are Fin p with p≥1p\ge1p≥1, so they run 0,…,p−10,\dots,p-10,…,p−1. ggg is defined as Finset.sup' of the gig_igi​, never as an independent function. The standing assumptions of (P) are kept: ggg is lower semicontinuous and positive on SSS.
  • Weak convexity. "Modulus" means "a valid constant". For real gig_igi​ it is ConvexOn of gi+β2∥⋅∥2g_i+\frac\beta2\|\cdot\|^2gi​+2β​∥⋅∥2 on SSS. For extended-real fff it is convexity of the epigraph of f+ιS+ρ2∥⋅∥2f+\iota_S+\frac\rho2\|\cdot\|^2f+ιS​+2ρ​∥⋅∥2.
  • Algorithm 2. A run is a predicate on iterates, candidates, selected indices, step sizes and weights. Each argmin is "some minimizer", candidates outside Iε(xn)I_\varepsilon(x_n)Iε​(xn​) are unconstrained, x−1=x0x_{-1}=x_0x−1​=x0​, and ratios are real numbers on S∩dom⁡fS\cap\operatorname{dom}fS∩domf.
  • Two misprints corrected. Step 1 declares an unused ω\omegaω and never declares ε\varepsilonε; it is read as ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0. The printed step-size rule τn≤1/max⁡{βθn/(1−ζ),δ}\tau_n\le1/\max\{\beta\theta_n/(1-\zeta),\delta\}τn​≤1/max{βθn​/(1−ζ),δ} does not give the inequality βθn≤βζ/τn\beta\theta_n\le\sqrt\beta\zeta/\tau_nβθn​≤β​ζ/τn​ that the proof uses. The run therefore uses τn≤1/max⁡{βθn/ζ,δ}\tau_n\le1/\max\{\sqrt\beta\theta_n/\zeta,\delta\}τn​≤1/max{β​θn​/ζ,δ}, the rule of Algorithm 1.
  • Other conventions. τˉ\bar\tauτˉ is Filter.liminf τ atTop, which is well defined because 0<τn≤1/δ0<\tau_n\le1/\delta0<τn​≤1/δ. The κˉ\bar\kappaκˉ-range is multiplied out to avoid dividing by ℓ\ellℓ.
  • Ruled out. The theorem cannot be satisfied trivially: the run constrains every iterate, and the strong lifted conclusion quantifies over all of ∂Lg(xˉ)\partial_L g(\bar x)∂L​g(xˉ). Membership xˉ∈dom⁡f\bar x\in\operatorname{dom}fxˉ∈domf is concluded explicitly, so the toReal value of +∞+\infty+∞ never enters.
  • Needed infrastructure. The subgradient inequality for weakly convex functions, the convexity of ∂L(h+ιS)\partial_L(h+\iota_S)∂L​(h+ιS​) for weakly convex hhh, a Fermat rule for ∂L\partial_L∂L​, and the formula for ∂Lmax⁡igi\partial_L\max_i g_i∂L​maxi​gi​. Each is reusable beyond this paper, and a contribution of any of them is welcome.

Selected references

  • R. I. Boţ, M. N. Dao, G. Li, Extrapolated proximal subgradient algorithms for nonconvex and nonsmooth fractional programs, arXiv:2003.04124v2 (2020); Math. Oper. Res. 47 (2022). https://arxiv.org/abs/2003.04124
  • J.-S. Pang, M. Razaviyayn, A. Alvarado, Computing B-stationary points of nonsmooth DC programs, Math. Oper. Res. 42(1) (2017). https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.2016.0795
  • Y. Rahimi, C. Wang, H. Dong, Y. Lou, A scale invariant approach for sparse signal recovery, SIAM J. Sci. Comput. 41 (2019). https://arxiv.org/abs/1812.08852
  • B. S. Mordukhovich, Variational Analysis and Generalized Differentiation I, Springer, 2006. https://doi.org/10.1007/3-540-31247-1
  • R. T. Rockafellar, R. J.-B. Wets, Variational Analysis, Springer, 1998. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-02431-3
16 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Extrapolated Proximal Subgradient Algorithms for Nonconvex and Nonsmooth Fractional Programs 2: Sufficient Decrease, Multi-Step Relative Error and KL Give Finite Length and Linear RatesResearch Paper

Motivation

Many first-order methods for nonconvex and nonsmooth optimization are analysed with the same template: a merit function decreases by a definite amount at every step, a subgradient of the merit function at the current point is bounded by the step length, and the Kurdyka–Łojasiewicz (KL) property of the merit function turns these two facts into a proof that the whole sequence of iterates has finite length and converges. Attouch and Bolte (Math. Program. 2009), Attouch, Bolte and Svaiter (Math. Program. 2013) and Bolte, Sabach and Teboulle (Math. Program. 2014) isolated this template as a set of abstract conditions. Later frameworks for methods with inertia or extrapolation, such as iPiano (Ochs, Chen, Brox and Pock, SIAM J. Imaging Sci. 2014), needed the relative error bound to involve more than one past step.

Boţ, Dao and Li (arXiv:2003.04124, Math. Oper. Res. 2022) state a framework (H1)–(H5) in which the relative error bound is a convex combination of several step lengths, past or future, plus a summable error, and the iterates of the algorithm may live in a different space from the merit function. They prove finite length, convergence, stationarity and, for KL exponent at most 12\tfrac1221​, linear rates; they then apply it to an extrapolated proximal subgradient method for fractional programs. This mission formalizes that abstract result, Theorem 5.2 of the paper.

Setting

Let H\mathcal HH and K\mathcal KK be finite-dimensional real Hilbert spaces and h:K→(−∞,+∞]h:\mathcal K\to(-\infty,+\infty]h:K→(−∞,+∞] a proper (never −∞-\infty−∞, finite somewhere) lower semicontinuous function. ∂Lh(z)\partial_L h(z)∂L​h(z) denotes the limiting subdifferential of hhh at zzz, empty where h(z)=+∞h(z)=+\inftyh(z)=+∞, and dist⁡(0,∅)=+∞\operatorname{dist}(0,\emptyset)=+\inftydist(0,∅)=+∞.

Data: sequences (xn)(x_n)(xn​) in H\mathcal HH and (zn)(z_n)(zn​) in K\mathcal KK; αn,βn>0\alpha_n,\beta_n>0αn​,βn​>0; Δn,εn≥0\Delta_n,\varepsilon_n\ge0Δn​,εn​≥0, with the convention Δk=0\Delta_k=0Δk​=0 for k<0k<0k<0; integers ı‾≤ıˉ\underline\imath\le\bar\imath​≤ˉ (not necessarily positive), I={ı‾,…,ıˉ}I=\{\underline\imath,\dots,\bar\imath\}I={​,…,ˉ}, and weights λi≥0\lambda_i\ge0λi​≥0 with ∑i∈Iλi=1\sum_{i\in I}\lambda_i=1∑i∈I​λi​=1. The conditions, for all n∈Nn\in\mathbb Nn∈N, are:

  • (H1) sufficient decrease: h(zn+1)+αnΔn2≤h(zn)h(z_{n+1})+\alpha_n\Delta_n^2\le h(z_n)h(zn+1​)+αn​Δn2​≤h(zn​);
  • (H2) relative error: βndist⁡(0,∂Lh(zn))≤∑i∈IλiΔn−i+εn\beta_n\operatorname{dist}(0,\partial_L h(z_n))\le\sum_{i\in I}\lambda_i\Delta_{n-i}+\varepsilon_nβn​dist(0,∂L​h(zn​))≤∑i∈I​λi​Δn−i​+εn​;
  • (H3) continuity: some subsequence zkn→z~z_{k_n}\to\tilde zzkn​​→z~ has h(zkn)→h(z~)h(z_{k_n})\to h(\tilde z)h(zkn​​)→h(z~);
  • (H4) parameters: α‾:=inf⁡αn>0\underline\alpha:=\inf\alpha_n>0α​:=infαn​>0, γ‾:=inf⁡αnβn>0\underline\gamma:=\inf\alpha_n\beta_n>0γ​:=infαn​βn​>0, ∑εn<+∞\sum\varepsilon_n<+\infty∑εn​<+∞;
  • (H5) distance: there are j∈Zj\in\mathbb Zj∈Z, c∈Rc\in\mathbb Rc∈R with ∥xn+1−xn∥≤c Δn+j\|x_{n+1}-x_n\|\le c\,\Delta_{n+j}∥xn+1​−xn​∥≤cΔn+j​.

Ω\OmegaΩ is the set of cluster points of (zn)(z_n)(zn​), Ω0={zˉ∈Ω:h(zn)→h(zˉ)}\Omega_0=\{\bar z\in\Omega:h(z_n)\to h(\bar z)\}Ω0​={zˉ∈Ω:h(zn​)→h(zˉ)}, and hˉ=h(zˉ)\bar h=h(\bar z)hˉ=h(zˉ) for zˉ∈Ω0\bar z\in\Omega_0zˉ∈Ω0​. A desingularizing function φ∈Φη\varphi\in\Phi_\etaφ∈Φη​ is continuous and concave on [0,η)[0,\eta)[0,η), vanishes at 000, and is C1C^1C1 with φ′>0\varphi'>0φ′>0 on (0,η)(0,\eta)(0,η). hhh has the KL property at zˉ\bar zzˉ if for some neighbourhood UUU of zˉ\bar zzˉ, η>0\eta>0η>0 and φ∈Φη\varphi\in\Phi_\etaφ∈Φη​, φ′(h(z)−h(zˉ))dist⁡(0,∂Lh(z))≥1\varphi'(h(z)-h(\bar z))\operatorname{dist}(0,\partial_L h(z))\ge1φ′(h(z)−h(zˉ))dist(0,∂L​h(z))≥1 whenever z∈Uz\in Uz∈U and h(zˉ)<h(z)<h(zˉ)+ηh(\bar z)<h(z)<h(\bar z)+\etah(zˉ)<h(z)<h(zˉ)+η; it has the KL property with exponent a∈[0,1)a\in[0,1)a∈[0,1) if φ\varphiφ can be taken as γs1−a\gamma s^{1-a}γs1−a.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5.2

Assume (H1)–(H4), (zn)(z_n)(zn​) bounded, hhh constant on Ω\OmegaΩ with the KL property at every point of Ω\OmegaΩ. Then

(i) ∑n=0∞Δn<∞;(ii) (H5)⇒∑n=0∞∥xn+1−xn∥<∞ and xn→xˉ;(iii) inf⁡βn>0⇒0∈∂Lh(zˉ)  ∀zˉ∈Ω0;\text{(i)}\ \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\Delta_n<\infty;\qquad \text{(ii)}\ \text{(H5)}\Rightarrow\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\|x_{n+1}-x_n\|<\infty \text{ and } x_n\to\bar x;\qquad \text{(iii)}\ \inf\beta_n>0\Rightarrow 0\in\partial_L h(\bar z)\ \ \forall\bar z\in\Omega_0;(i) n=0∑∞​Δn​<∞;(ii) (H5)⇒n=0∑∞​∥xn+1​−xn​∥<∞ and xn​→xˉ;(iii) infβn​>0⇒0∈∂L​h(zˉ)  ∀zˉ∈Ω0​;

(iv) if hhh has KL exponent a≤12a\le\tfrac12a≤21​ on Ω\OmegaΩ, ı‾≤1\underline\imath\le1​≤1, inf⁡n,iαn−iβn2>0\inf_{n,i}\alpha_{n-i}\beta_n^2>0infn,i​αn−i​βn2​>0 and εn/βn=O(h(zn−ıˉ)−h(zn+1−ı‾))\varepsilon_n/\beta_n=O(\sqrt{h(z_{n-\bar\imath})-h(z_{n+1-\underline\imath})})εn​/βn​=O(h(zn−ˉ​)−h(zn+1−​​)​), then for some γ1>0\gamma_1>0γ1​>0, ρ∈(0,1)\rho\in(0,1)ρ∈(0,1),

h(zn)−hˉ≤γ1ρn∀n,h(z_n)-\bar h\le\gamma_1\rho^n\quad\forall n,h(zn​)−hˉ≤γ1​ρn∀n,

and under (H5) and ∑k≥nεk=O(h(zn−ıˉ)−hˉ)\sum_{k\ge n}\varepsilon_k=O(\sqrt{h(z_{n-\bar\imath})-\bar h})∑k≥n​εk​=O(h(zn−ˉ​)−hˉ​), ∥xn−xˉ∥≤γ2ρn/2\|x_n-\bar x\|\le\gamma_2\rho^{n/2}∥xn​−xˉ∥≤γ2​ρn/2 for the same ρ\rhoρ.

Milestones

Lemma 2.3 (uniformized KL along a bounded sequence, and its power form under an exponent); Lemma 5.1(i)–(iii) (nonemptiness of Ω0\Omega_0Ω0​ and monotone convergence of values; ∑Δn2≤(h(z0)−h(zˉ))/α‾\sum\Delta_n^2\le(h(z_0)-h(\bar z))/\underline\alpha∑Δn2​≤(h(z0​)−h(zˉ))/α​; the subgradient bound and stationarity); the tail bound (24) from the proof of (i); Theorem 5.2(i); and the first claim of Theorem 5.2(iv).

Significance

The theorem separates what is specific to an algorithm (checking (H1)–(H5) for its iterates) from what is common to all KL-based analyses (finite length, convergence, rates). In the paper it yields global convergence of the extrapolated proximal subgradient method (Theorem 5.5) with zn=(xn+1,xn)z_n=(x_{n+1},x_n)zn​=(xn+1​,xn​) and I={0,1}I=\{0,1\}I={0,1}, and Remark 5.4 shows that the frameworks of Attouch–Bolte–Svaiter, Bolte–Sabach–Teboulle, Frankel–Garrigos–Peypouquet and iPiano are special cases, while the linear rate for the iterates in the multi-step setting is new relative to those frameworks.

The result is proved on paper. To our knowledge no machine-checked version of this abstract framework exists. A formal proof yields a reusable theorem: any later mission that verifies (H1)–(H5) for a specific method gets convergence and rates by citation. Related single-algorithm KL convergence results on the platform (proximal alternating minimization, PALM, proximal ADMM) each repeat the same argument; this framework is the common abstraction.

Difficulty

The naive argument—sum (H1) to get ∑Δn2<∞\sum\Delta_n^2<\infty∑Δn2​<∞—gives only square-summability, which does not imply convergence of the iterates. Finite length needs the KL inequality along the whole tail of the sequence with one function φ\varphiφ, but the KL property is only pointwise; this requires a uniformization over the (compact) cluster set and the restriction to Ω0\Omega_0Ω0​, where values converge. The multi-step error with possibly negative indices in III means the right-hand side of (H2) can involve future steps, so the telescoping estimate must absorb sums with shifted index ranges. For the rates, the KL exponent turns the inequality into a recursion between rn+1−ı‾r_{n+1-\underline\imath}rn+1−​​ and rn−ıˉr_{n-\bar\imath}rn−ˉ​ separated by several steps, whose contraction must be shown to give a geometric rate.

Formalization scope

H\mathcal HH is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin N) and K\mathcal KK is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin P); hhh takes values in EReal, with properness and limiting subdifferential from the published NonconvexSplitting.Shared definitions and the KL property (HasKLProperty, IsDesingularizer, KLIneq) from the published NonconvexSplitting.ADMMKL definitions. η\etaη is a positive real. Δ\DeltaΔ is indexed by Z\mathbb ZZ and vanishes on negative integers. dist⁡(0,∂Lh(z))≤r\operatorname{dist}(0,\partial_L h(z))\le rdist(0,∂L​h(z))≤r is encoded as "some v∈∂Lh(z)v\in\partial_L h(z)v∈∂L​h(z) has ∥v∥≤r\|v\|\le r∥v∥≤r", and the KL inequality as "every v∈∂Lh(z)v\in\partial_L h(z)v∈∂L​h(z) satisfies φ′(⋅)∥v∥≥1\varphi'(\cdot)\|v\|\ge1φ′(⋅)∥v∥≥1"; Metric.infDist is never used, because it returns 000 on the empty set where the paper's distance is +∞+\infty+∞, which would make (H2) trivially satisfiable. Infima are encoded by positive lower bounds; O(⋅)O(\cdot)O(⋅) hypotheses as eventual bounds with a constant; hˉ\bar hhˉ by quantifying over Ω0\Omega_0Ω0​. Lemma 5.1(ii) assumes h(z0)<+∞h(z_0)<+\inftyh(z0​)<+∞ explicitly, which the page presupposes.

The definitions file FracPSG.Abstract.Basic (the setting, (H1)–(H5), Ω\OmegaΩ, Ω0\Omega_0Ω0​, the KL exponent) is reusable by any mission that instantiates the framework. Contributions welcome: proofs of the milestones, the uniformized KL lemma in general form, and summation lemmas for sequences indexed by Z\mathbb ZZ.

Selected references

  • R. I. Boţ, M. N. Dao, G. Li, Extrapolated Proximal Subgradient Algorithms for Nonconvex and Nonsmooth Fractional Programs, Math. Oper. Res., 2022; preprint arXiv:2003.04124v2 (2020). https://arxiv.org/abs/2003.04124
  • H. Attouch, J. Bolte, B. F. Svaiter, Convergence of descent methods for semi-algebraic and tame problems, Math. Program. 137, 2013. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-011-0484-9
  • J. Bolte, S. Sabach, M. Teboulle, Proximal alternating linearized minimization for nonconvex and nonsmooth problems, Math. Program. 146, 2014. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-013-0701-9
  • H. Attouch, J. Bolte, On the convergence of the proximal algorithm for nonsmooth functions involving analytic features, Math. Program. 116, 2009. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-007-0133-5
  • P. Ochs, Y. Chen, T. Brox, T. Pock, iPiano: Inertial proximal algorithm for nonconvex optimization, SIAM J. Imaging Sci. 7, 2014. https://doi.org/10.1137/130942954
14 thms2 active usersReviewed
Probability·Captain: mikedeng1

Optimal Inapproximability Results for MAX-CUT and Other 2-Variable CSPs? 4: The Correlated Gaussian Orthant Probability Satisfies Λρ(μ) ≤ (1 + ρ)·φ(t)/t·N(t√((1 − ρ)/(1 + ρ)))Research Paper

Motivation

Khot, Kindler, Mossel and O'Donnell, Optimal Inapproximability Results for MAX-CUT and Other 2-Variable CSPs? (SIAM J. Comput. 37(1), 2007), prove that, assuming the Unique Games Conjecture, the Goemans–Williamson approximation ratio for MAX-CUT is optimal, and they extend the method to MAX-q-CUT and to Γ-MAX-2LIN(q). For the q-ary problems the key analytic input is the theorem of Mossel, O'Donnell and Oleszkiewicz (arXiv:math/0503503), the MOO theorem. It bounds the noise stability of a low-influence function with mean µ by a Gaussian quantity, the correlated Gaussian orthant probability Λ_ρ(µ): the probability that two ρ-correlated standard Gaussians both exceed the threshold t at which a single one has tail mass µ.

The hardness bounds of the paper for Γ-MAX-2LIN(q) are stated in terms of Λ_ρ(1/q). They are explicit only after Λ_ρ(µ) is estimated. Proposition 6.1 of the paper gives such an estimate in closed form, by slightly improving a bound from the proof of Lemma 11.1 of de Klerk, Pasechnik and Warners (Approximate graph colouring and MAX-k-CUT algorithms based on the theta function, J. Combin. Optim., 2004). The same quantity at µ = 1/2 is Sheppard's orthant probability (Phil. Trans. R. Soc. A 192, 1899), the source of the arccos formulas used throughout the MAX-CUT part of the paper.

This mission formalizes Proposition 6.1 and the steps of its printed proof.

Setting

Let φ be the standard Gaussian density and N the Gaussian tail probability function:

ϕ(x)=12πe−x2/2,N(x)=∫x∞ϕ(s) ds.\phi(x)=\frac{1}{\sqrt{2\pi}}e^{-x^2/2},\qquad N(x)=\int_x^\infty \phi(s)\,ds .ϕ(x)=2π​1​e−x2/2,N(x)=∫x∞​ϕ(s)ds.

So N(x) = Pr[X ≥ x] for a standard Gaussian X. N is strictly decreasing from 1 to 0, and N(0) = 1/2.

Let X and Y be independent standard Gaussian random variables. For ρ ∈ [0, 1] put

X′=ρX+1−ρ2 Y.X'=\rho X+\sqrt{1-\rho^2}\,Y .X′=ρX+1−ρ2​Y.

Then (X, X′) is a centred normal pair with unit variances and covariance ρ, the pair of Definition 8 of the paper. For 0 < µ < 1 let t be the unique real number with Pr[X ≥ t] = µ, and define

Λρ(μ)=Pr⁡[X≥t and X′≥t].\Lambda_\rho(\mu)=\Pr[X\ge t\ \text{and}\ X'\ge t].Λρ​(μ)=Pr[X≥t and X′≥t].

The threshold t is positive exactly when µ < 1/2. Λ_ρ(µ) is the noise stability, in Gaussian space, of the indicator of a half-line of measure µ.

The proof uses two exponents. For u, v ∈ ℝ, with ρ < 1 and t > 0,

g(u,v)=u+v1+ρ+(u−v)2+2(1−ρ)uv2(1−ρ2)t2,h(u,v)=u+v1+ρ+(u−v)22(1−ρ2)t2.g(u,v)=\frac{u+v}{1+\rho}+\frac{(u-v)^2+2(1-\rho)uv}{2(1-\rho^2)t^2},\qquad h(u,v)=\frac{u+v}{1+\rho}+\frac{(u-v)^2}{2(1-\rho^2)t^2}.g(u,v)=1+ρu+v​+2(1−ρ2)t2(u−v)2+2(1−ρ)uv​,h(u,v)=1+ρu+v​+2(1−ρ2)t2(u−v)2​.

In Lean these are phi, tailN, orthantProb ρ t, Lambda ρ μ, gExp ρ t u v and hExp ρ t u v in the namespace OptInapprox.Orthant.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 6.1 (p. 14)

For any 0 ≤ µ < 1/2, let t > 0 be the number with N(t) = µ. Then for all 0 ≤ ρ ≤ 1,

Λρ(μ) ≤ (1+ρ)⋅ϕ(t)t⋅N ⁣(t1−ρ1+ρ).(4)\Lambda_\rho(\mu)\ \le\ (1+\rho)\cdot\frac{\phi(t)}{t}\cdot N\!\Big(t\sqrt{\tfrac{1-\rho}{1+\rho}}\Big).\tag{4}Λρ​(μ) ≤ (1+ρ)⋅tϕ(t)​⋅N(t1+ρ1−ρ​​).(4)

The endpoint ρ = 1 is part of the goal. There X′ = X, Λ₁(µ) = µ, and (4) becomes the classical Mills-ratio inequality N(t) ≤ φ(t)/t.

Milestones (proof of Proposition 6.1, pp. 30–31)

  1. (18). For 0 ≤ ρ < 1, t > 0 and µ = N(t),
Λρ(μ)=12π1−ρ2⋅t2exp⁡(−t21+ρ)∫0∞ ⁣ ⁣∫0∞e−g(u,v) du dv.\Lambda_\rho(\mu)=\frac{1}{2\pi\sqrt{1-\rho^2}\cdot t^2}\exp\Big(-\frac{t^2}{1+\rho}\Big)\int_0^\infty\!\!\int_0^\infty e^{-g(u,v)}\,du\,dv .Λρ​(μ)=2π1−ρ2​⋅t21​exp(−1+ρt2​)∫0∞​∫0∞​e−g(u,v)dudv.
  1. g ≥ h on u, v ≥ 0.
  2. (19)–(20).
∫0∞ ⁣ ⁣∫0∞e−g≤∫0∞ ⁣ ⁣∫0∞e−h=2π(1+ρ)1−ρ2⋅t⋅exp⁡(1−ρ1+ρ⋅t22)⋅N(t1−ρ1+ρ).\int_0^\infty\!\!\int_0^\infty e^{-g}\le\int_0^\infty\!\!\int_0^\infty e^{-h}=\sqrt{2\pi}(1+\rho)\sqrt{1-\rho^2}\cdot t\cdot\exp\Big(\frac{1-\rho}{1+\rho}\cdot\frac{t^2}{2}\Big)\cdot N\Big(t\sqrt{\tfrac{1-\rho}{1+\rho}}\Big).∫0∞​∫0∞​e−g≤∫0∞​∫0∞​e−h=2π​(1+ρ)1−ρ2​⋅t⋅exp(1+ρ1−ρ​⋅2t2​)⋅N(t1+ρ1−ρ​​).
  1. Lower bound (side note in the proof of Corollary 10, p. 31):
μ⋅N(t1−ρ1+ρ)≤Λρ(μ).\mu\cdot N\Big(t\sqrt{\tfrac{1-\rho}{1+\rho}}\Big)\le\Lambda_\rho(\mu).μ⋅N(t1+ρ1−ρ​​)≤Λρ​(μ).

Significance

Proposition 6.1 makes the MOO theorem quantitative for thresholds. With the lower bound of milestone 4 it determines Λ_ρ(µ) up to the factor 1 + ρ, and up to 1 + o(1) as µ → 0, since φ(t)/t ∼ N(t) as t → ∞ (Corollary 10, part 1). Through Corollary 10 it yields the asymptotics of qΛ_ρ(1/q) used in the paper's hardness results for MAX-q-CUT and Γ-MAX-2LIN(q). These quantities also appear in later work on q-ary noise stability and on the approximability of 2-CSPs.

The proposition is proved in the paper; nothing here is open. Mathlib (at the pinned revision) contains no proof of it, of the bivariate-normal integral representation (18), or of the Mills-ratio inequality N(t) ≤ φ(t)/t. On the platform, Mills' inequality appears only as an open statement in the two-sided form Pr[|X| > z] ≤ √(2/π)·e^{−z²/2}/z (KLTNuclear.Lasso.gaussian_tail), and there is no item for orthant probabilities. A complete development provides:

  • the substitution x = t + u/t, y = t + v/t in the bivariate normal density;
  • a closed-form quadrant integral after the rotation r = u + v, s = u − v;
  • the identification of a probability under a product Gaussian measure with an explicit double integral.

Each of these is reusable for Gaussian tail and orthant estimates.

Difficulty

The inequality itself is elementary once (18) and (20) are available. The work lies in the two integral identities and in their measure-theoretic glue.

For (18), the orthant probability is defined as a measure of a set under the product of two one-dimensional Gaussian laws. Writing it as a double integral of the bivariate density is a linear change of variables with Jacobian √(1 − ρ²). The shift and scaling by t then has Jacobian 1/t², and the quadratic form has to be expanded exactly.

For (20), the region u, v ≥ 0 becomes the wedge |s| ≤ r after the rotation, so the inner integral is a truncated Gaussian integral rather than a full one. The closed form appears only after an integration by parts in r, or an equivalent completion of the square.

The endpoint ρ = 1 is not covered by the printed argument, because (18) divides by √(1 − ρ²). It needs Mills' inequality separately. A proof that only treats ρ < 1 does not close the goal.

Formalization scope

  • Gaussian law. Λ_ρ(µ) is a genuine probability. stdGaussPair is the product of two copies of Mathlib's gaussianReal 0 1 on ℝ × ℝ. orthantProb ρ t is the real-valued measure of {X ≥ t, ρX + √(1 − ρ²)Y ≥ t}, which is the representation the paper itself uses on p. 31.
  • Choice of t. Lambda ρ μ chooses a t with Pr[X ≥ t] = µ, where the probability is taken under gaussianReal 0 1. Such a t is unique, so the choice does not matter. For µ ∉ (0, 1) no such t exists and the value is a placeholder 0 that no statement uses.
  • Hypotheses of the statements. Every theorem takes t > 0 and N(t) = µ as hypotheses, as Proposition 6.1 does; the redundant 0 ≤ µ < 1/2 is kept as printed.
  • Functions. φ is written out explicitly and N is the Bochner integral of φ over (x, ∞).
  • Integrals. The double integrals of (18)–(20) are iterated integrals over (0, ∞), inner variable u, as printed. Milestone 3 also asserts that e^{−h} is integrable on the quadrant, so (19) cannot hold through a junk zero integral.
  • Range of ρ. The goal and milestone 4 take 0 ≤ ρ ≤ 1, as on the page. Milestones 1–3 take 0 ≤ ρ < 1, because their constants divide by √(1 − ρ²) or 1 − ρ², and the printed proof uses them only there. This is the only hypothesis added relative to the page.
  • Trivializing formalizations, ruled out.
    • Defining Λ_ρ(µ) by the right-hand side of (18) would make milestone 1 a tautology and the goal a calculus exercise about a formula unrelated to Gaussians. The definition here is a measure of a set.
    • Allowing t = 0 would put the junk value φ(0)/0 = 0 on the right of (4). The statements require t > 0.

The two remarks printed right after Proposition 6.1 (on Λ_ρ(1/2) and on removing the factor 1 + ρ) are not part of this mission.

Contributions are welcome on all four milestones, on the case ρ = 1 of the goal (Mills' inequality), and on general lemmas: N as Pr[X ≥ x], monotonicity and positivity of N, and the law of (X, ρX + √(1 − ρ²)Y) as a bivariate normal.

Selected references

  • S. Khot, G. Kindler, E. Mossel, R. O'Donnell, Optimal Inapproximability Results for MAX-CUT and Other 2-Variable CSPs?, SIAM J. Comput. 37(1), 2007 (authors' version of February 7, 2007). https://doi.org/10.1137/S0097539705447372
  • E. Mossel, R. O'Donnell, K. Oleszkiewicz, Noise stability of functions with low influences: invariance and optimality, FOCS 2005; Annals of Mathematics 171, 2010. https://arxiv.org/abs/math/0503503
  • E. de Klerk, D. Pasechnik, J. Warners, Approximate graph colouring and MAX-k-CUT algorithms based on the theta function, Journal of Combinatorial Optimization 8, 2004 (Lemma 11.1).
  • W. F. Sheppard, On the application of the theory of error to cases of normal distribution and normal correlation, Phil. Trans. R. Soc. London A 192, 101–168, 1899. https://doi.org/10.1098/rsta.1899.0003
6 thms2 active usersReviewed
Discrete Geometry·Captain: marwahaha

Slope-field perturbations of the two-cylinder coveringOpen Problem

Motivation

A slope-field perturbation of a two-cylinder cover trades a reduction in projected area against the extra overlap needed to maintain coverage. The slope-field manuscript studies when the net cost becomes strictly smaller. The companion radial-sweep manuscript establishes finite triangular approximation with arbitrary tagged equal subdivisions. Both manuscripts map to the same published Lean goal, so this draft covers their shared target. The source manuscript presents the surrounding research claim.

Setting

A cylinder is a measurable finite-area planar base plus a line in its perpendicular unit direction. Ruled sets vary the segment direction over compact planar labels. Radial sweeps use p₀+ρ(a+tb)+s(e+w(t)), with 0≤ρ≤R(t), |s|≤L, and w′(t)=λ(t)(a+tb).

Formalization target

Prove the seven-part fourPaperMain conjunction: the explicit angular-area construction; C¹ hyperbolic approximation; C¹ square-zero-derivative approximation; regular-tetrahedron counterexamples with parallelogram bases and with bounded open bases; aligned radial triangular approximation; and actual-sweep projection bounds. In particular, the tetrahedron clauses require

∑i∣Bi∣<12Amin⁡(K),∑i∣Bi∣∣πui⊥K∣<12.\sum_i|B_i|<\frac12 A_{\min}(K),\qquad\sum_i\frac{|B_i|}{|\pi_{u_i^\perp}K|}<\frac12.i∑​∣Bi​∣<21​Amin​(K),i∑​∣πui⊥​​K∣∣Bi​∣​<21​.

The selected formal target is OAI.CylinderCovering.fourPaperMain.

Significance and status

The selected published goal is a joint endpoint shared by four related manuscripts, and therefore includes more than the slope-field application alone. Its finite covers retain both cost inequalities. The published target is currently Open; the manuscript's argument and a checked Lean proof are separate deliverables.

Difficulty

A local area decrease cannot guarantee a global cover. All regularity, exact coverage and error bounds in the separate conjuncts must hold in their stated regimes.

Formalization scope

Hyperbolic and nilpotent clauses use their C¹ definitions; radial data require a nonempty parameter interval, positive segment half-length, continuous nonnegative cap and alignment derivative. All tagged equal subdivisions are covered. The radial clause requires triangular-base area to converge to weightedArea(D), while actual sweep projections have eventual cost at most weightedArea(D)+ε and the corresponding limsup bound. The separate RuledApproximation.fullMain is also retained as a related reference but is not mislabeled as one of these seven conjuncts.

Selected references

  • OpenAI, Finite triangular approximation of radial sweeps, preprint, 2026. Pinned manuscript.
  • OpenAI, Slope-field perturbations of the two-cylinder covering, preprint, 2026. Pinned manuscript.
  • OpenAI, accompanying formal statements, commit adc7f1241b42. Goal source.
30 thms2 active usersReviewed
Optimal Transport·Captain: wurtle

Sharp One-Third Stability of Brenier MapsResearch Paper

Motivation

Given a source probability measure ρ\rhoρ and a target μ\muμ on Rd\mathbb R^dRd, Brenier's theorem (Brenier 1991) says that when ρ\rhoρ is absolutely continuous there is a unique map TμT_\muTμ​ pushing ρ\rhoρ to μ\muμ that minimizes the quadratic cost ∫∣x−T(x)∣2 dρ\int|x-T(x)|^2\,d\rho∫∣x−T(x)∣2dρ, and that it is the gradient of a convex function. Fixing ρ\rhoρ, the assignment μ↦Tμ\mu\mapsto T_\muμ↦Tμ​ embeds the space of probability measures into L2(ρ)L^2(\rho)L2(ρ); this linearization of optimal transport is used in statistics, data analysis and machine learning to compare measures by comparing their maps. Its usefulness depends on quantitative stability: how far apart can TμT_\muTμ​ and TνT_\nuTν​ be when μ\muμ and ν\nuν are close in Wasserstein distance? For general targets the map cannot be Lipschitz in the target, and the question is which Hölder exponent holds uniformly.

This mission asks for a machine-checked proof that, for a uniform source on a convex body, the sharp uniform exponent is exactly 1/31/31/3, as claimed in an OpenAI preprint dated September 25, 2026 (source). The preprint has not been peer reviewed and its claims have not been independently verified; on the platform the Lean goal below is open.

Timeline

  • 1991 — Brenier proves existence and uniqueness of quadratic optimal maps as gradients of convex potentials (CPAM 1991).
  • 2011 — Gigli reports Ambrosio's local one-half Hölder estimate along target curves near regular data (Proc. Edinb. Math. Soc. 2011, Corollary 3.4).
  • 2020–2021 — Berman obtains stability for varying sources against fixed targets (Found. Comput. Math. 2021); Mérigot, Delalande and Chazal derive target-uniform bounds, including a W12/15W_1^{2/15}W12/15​ estimate for a uniform convex source (AISTATS 2020).
  • 2023 — Delalande and Mérigot prove an L2L^2L2 map bound of order W11/6W_1^{1/6}W11/6​ for densities bounded above and below on convex domains, with a convex-gradient interpolation inequality (Duke 2023).
  • 2024 — Letrouit and Mérigot extend potential stability to John domains (arXiv:2411.04908).
  • 2025 — Divol, Niles-Weed and Pooladian obtain a W21/3W_2^{1/3}W21/3​ map estimate for nondegenerate finite targets, with constants depending on the number, masses and geometry of the atoms (IMRN 2025).
  • 2026 — Letrouit proves that exponents above 1/31/31/3 fail for a nonconvex source and conjectures uniform square-root stability in W2W_2W2​ for uniform convex sources (C. R. Math. 2026, Theorem 2 and Conjecture 3).
  • September 2026 — The OpenAI preprint claims the uniform W21/3W_2^{1/3}W21/3​ bound for every uniform convex source and shows that no larger exponent holds, disproving the square-root conjecture (Theorem 1.1, p. 2; Proposition 2.2, p. 4).

Setting

Fix d≥2d\ge2d≥2, a compact convex K⊂RdK\subset\mathbb R^dK⊂Rd with nonempty interior, and the uniform source ρ=1K dx/∣K∣\rho=\mathbf 1_K\,dx/|K|ρ=1K​dx/∣K∣. Fix a nonempty compact Y⊂RdY\subset\mathbb R^dY⊂Rd and let Prob(Y)\mathrm{Prob}(Y)Prob(Y) be the Borel probability measures with μ(Rd∖Y)=0\mu(\mathbb R^d\setminus Y)=0μ(Rd∖Y)=0. A coupling of μ,ν\mu,\nuμ,ν is a probability measure on Rd×Rd\mathbb R^d\times\mathbb R^dRd×Rd with marginals μ,ν\mu,\nuμ,ν, and

W2(μ,ν)=(inf⁡π∫∣y−z∣2 dπ(y,z))1/2.W_2(\mu,\nu)=\Bigl(\inf_{\pi}\int|y-z|^2\,d\pi(y,z)\Bigr)^{1/2}.W2​(μ,ν)=(πinf​∫∣y−z∣2dπ(y,z))1/2.

For μ∈Prob(Y)\mu\in\mathrm{Prob}(Y)μ∈Prob(Y), TμT_\muTμ​ is the Brenier map: a measurable TTT with T#ρ=μT_\#\rho=\muT#​ρ=μ whose graph coupling (id,T)#ρ(\mathrm{id},T)_\#\rho(id,T)#​ρ is the unique optimal coupling of ρ\rhoρ and μ\muμ. Distances between maps are measured in L2(ρ)L^2(\rho)L2(ρ): ∥T−S∥L2(ρ)=(∫∣T−S∣2dρ)1/2\|T-S\|_{L^2(\rho)}=(\int|T-S|^2d\rho)^{1/2}∥T−S∥L2(ρ)​=(∫∣T−S∣2dρ)1/2.

Formalization targets

Milestone: Proposition 2.2 (p. 4) — the exponent cannot be improved

For every d≥2d\ge2d≥2, with K=Y=[−1,1]dK=Y=[-1,1]^dK=Y=[−1,1]d and every α>1/3\alpha>1/3α>1/3,

sup⁡μ≠ν∈Prob(Y)∥Tμ−Tν∥L2(ρ)W2(μ,ν)α=+∞,\sup_{\mu\ne\nu\in\mathrm{Prob}(Y)}\frac{\|T_\mu-T_\nu\|_{L^2(\rho)}}{W_2(\mu,\nu)^\alpha}=+\infty,μ=ν∈Prob(Y)sup​W2​(μ,ν)α∥Tμ​−Tν​∥L2(ρ)​​=+∞,

and the supremum stays infinite when both targets have exactly three atoms. In Lean (one_third_exponent_is_sharp): for every α>1/3\alpha>1/3α>1/3 and C>0C>0C>0 there are distinct three-atom probability measures on the cube with unique optimal maps T,T′T,T'T,T′ and C W2α<∥T−T′∥C\,W_2^\alpha<\|T-T'\|CW2α​<∥T−T′∥.

Goal: Theorem 1.1 (p. 2) — uniform one-third stability

For every KKK, YYY as above there is a finite constant C(K,Y)C(K,Y)C(K,Y) such that for all μ,ν∈Prob(Y)\mu,\nu\in\mathrm{Prob}(Y)μ,ν∈Prob(Y) the Brenier maps exist, are unique, and

∥Tμ−Tν∥L2(ρ)≤C(K,Y) W2(μ,ν)1/3.\|T_\mu-T_\nu\|_{L^2(\rho)}\le C(K,Y)\,W_2(\mu,\nu)^{1/3}.∥Tμ​−Tν​∥L2(ρ)​≤C(K,Y)W2​(μ,ν)1/3.

The targets may be atomic, singular or absolutely continuous; the constant does not depend on them. In Lean this is one_third_stability. Together the two statements determine the sharp exponent in this uniform class, which is the second sentence of Theorem 1.1.

Significance

The result itself. The upper bound improves every earlier target-uniform exponent (2/152/152/15, 1/61/61/6, 1/51/51/5, 1/41/41/4 in W1W_1W1​ or W2W_2W2​) to 1/31/31/3 in W2W_2W2​, with a constant independent of atom counts, atom masses, separations and density bounds. The lower bound disproves Letrouit's conjectured exponent 1/21/21/2 with only three atoms on a cube. The pair gives the exact uniform stability exponent of the linearized optimal-transport embedding for uniform convex sources.

Formalizing it. Mathlib has measures, couplings and Lebesgue integration but no optimal-transport theory. A formal development would supply Wasserstein distance, existence and uniqueness of Brenier maps for semi-discrete and general targets, and Lipschitz convex potentials, all reusable. The sharpness statement is the more elementary one and is a natural first milestone.

Difficulty

The standard route bounds the difference of convex potentials and then converts it to a gradient bound by an interpolation inequality; previous potential estimates lose a power, giving exponents below 1/31/31/3. The preprint's key step is a linear W2W_2W2​ bound on the L2(ρ)L^2(\rho)L2(ρ) distance of potentials, obtained by moving the sites of finite targets along an optimal coupling with fixed masses and controlling the intercept velocity through a uniform moment inequality for the cells of a maximum of affine functions (Lemma 4.1, p. 9; Proposition 5.1, p. 12). The constant must stay uniform as cell masses or faces degenerate, which rules out any argument relying on a spectral gap of the cell graph Laplacian. The final passage from finite to arbitrary Borel targets needs stability of optimal maps under approximation (Proposition 6.3, p. 16).

Formalization scope

  • Space is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d) with Borel measures. uniformMeasure K is (vol K)−1⋅vol∣K(\mathrm{vol}\,K)^{-1}\cdot\mathrm{vol}|_K(volK)−1⋅vol∣K​; with KKK compact convex with nonempty interior its volume is positive and finite.
  • IsSupported μ Y means μ(Yc)=0\mu(Y^c)=0μ(Yc)=0. Couplings are probability measures with the two marginals; costs are lower integrals in ℝ≥0∞; W2W_2W2​ is the square root of the real part of the infimal cost, finite here because supports are bounded.
  • IsUniqueQuadraticOptimalMap ρ μ T asserts that TTT is measurable, pushes ρ\rhoρ to μ\muμ, is cost-optimal among all couplings, and that every coupling of no larger cost equals the graph coupling. The goal must therefore also produce the Brenier maps; they are not assumed.
  • The constant is chosen after ddd, KKK, YYY and before μ,ν\mu,\nuμ,ν, and is required to be finite and nonnegative.
  • The sharpness milestone fixes K=Y=[−1,1]dK=Y=[-1,1]^dK=Y=[−1,1]d, requires exactly three distinct atoms with positive weights, μ≠ν\mu\ne\nuμ=ν and W2>0W_2>0W2​>0, so it cannot be satisfied trivially.

Selected references

  • OpenAI, Sharp One-Third Stability of Brenier Maps, OpenAI Math Release preprint, September 25, 2026. https://github.com/openai/math/blob/adc7f1241b42e322a6451854ab7e4b4c146bf78a/preprints/Sharp-One-Third-Stability-of-Brenier-Maps-September-25-2026/article.pdf
  • Y. Brenier, Polar factorization and monotone rearrangement of vector-valued functions, Comm. Pure Appl. Math. 44 (1991), 375–417. https://doi.org/10.1002/cpa.3160440402
  • C. Letrouit, Unstable optimal transport maps, C. R. Math. 364 (2026), 333–344. https://doi.org/10.5802/crmath.834
  • A. Delalande, Q. Mérigot, Quantitative stability of optimal transport maps under variations of the target measure, Duke Math. J. 172 (2023), 3321–3357. https://doi.org/10.1215/00127094-2022-0106
  • Q. Mérigot, A. Delalande, F. Chazal, Quantitative stability of optimal transport maps and linearization of the 2-Wasserstein space, AISTATS 2020, PMLR 108. https://proceedings.mlr.press/v108/merigot20a.html
  • V. Divol, J. Niles-Weed, A.-A. Pooladian, Tight stability bounds for entropic Brenier maps, IMRN 2025, rnaf078. https://doi.org/10.1093/imrn/rnaf078
  • C. Letrouit, Q. Mérigot, Gluing methods for quantitative stability of optimal transport maps, arXiv:2411.04908 (2024). https://arxiv.org/abs/2411.04908v3
  • R. J. Berman, Convergence rates for discretized Monge–Ampère equations and quantitative stability of optimal transport, Found. Comput. Math. 21 (2021), 1099–1140. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10208-020-09480-x
  • N. Gigli, On Hölder continuity-in-time of the optimal transport map towards measures along a curve, Proc. Edinb. Math. Soc. 54 (2011), 401–409. https://doi.org/10.1017/S001309150800117X
3 thms2 active usersReviewed
Mathematical PhysicsPartial Differential Equations·Captain: wurtle

Nonuniqueness for the periodic hard-sphere Boltzmann equationResearch Paper

Motivation: uniqueness of weak Boltzmann solutions

The Boltzmann equation describes a dilute gas through a density F(t,x,v)F(t,x,v)F(t,x,v) of particles at position xxx with velocity vvv, evolving by free transport and binary collisions. For hard spheres, the collision rate is proportional to the normal relative speed. In 1989 DiPerna and Lions constructed global renormalized solutions for all initial data with finite mass, energy and entropy, and weak stability holds at the same level. Existence and stability do not give uniqueness, though: the physical bounds do not even make the quadratic collision term locally integrable, and the uniqueness of general renormalized solutions is a basic question in kinetic theory (Silvestre 2022, §2). Uniqueness is known only under much stronger assumptions, such as Maxwellian upper bounds or closeness to equilibrium.

Timeline

  • 1974 — Ukai: global existence and uniqueness near a Maxwellian for periodic cutoff hard potentials (Proc. Japan Acad. 1974).
  • 1978 — Kaniel and Shinbrot: uniqueness and local existence under Maxwellian upper bounds (CMP 1978).
  • 1988 — Golse, Lions, Perthame and Sentis: velocity averaging lemmas (JFA 1988).
  • 1989 — DiPerna and Lions: global renormalized solutions and weak stability (Ann. of Math. 1989); the entropy inequality follows in 1991 (ARMA 1991).
  • 1999 — For the spatially homogeneous hard-sphere equation, Mischler and Wennberg prove uniqueness among conservative solutions with finite mass and energy (Ann. IHP C 1999); Wennberg gives homogeneous nonuniqueness examples in which the energy increases (J. Stat. Phys. 1999).
  • 2010 — Levermore and Masmoudi give a periodic formulation of renormalized solutions relative to a Maxwellian (ARMA 2010).
  • 2024–2026 — Ill-posedness results: Chen–Holmer for the constant kernel (Ann. PDE 2024), Chen–Guo–Shen–Zhang for hard spheres in Gaussian-weighted Lv2HxsL^2_vH^s_xLv2​Hxs​ (arXiv:2606.01331). Gismondi, Golding and Novack conjecture nonuniqueness of renormalized inhomogeneous Landau and Boltzmann solutions for a dense class of data (arXiv:2608.13758).
  • 2026 — An OpenAI preprint, Nonuniqueness for the periodic hard-sphere Boltzmann equation (OpenAI Math Release, September 23, 2026), claims a single finite-entropy datum on T3×R3\mathbb T^3\times\mathbb R^3T3×R3 with two distinct admissible solutions. It has not been peer reviewed, and the claim has not been formally verified.

Setting

Phase space is Ω=Tx3×Rv3\Omega=\mathbb T^3_x\times\mathbb R^3_vΩ=Tx3​×Rv3​, with T3=R3/Z3\mathbb T^3=\mathbb R^3/\mathbb Z^3T3=R3/Z3. For incoming velocities v,v∗v,v_*v,v∗​ and a collision normal ω∈S2\omega\in S^2ω∈S2, put a=(v−v∗)⋅ωa=(v-v_*)\cdot\omegaa=(v−v∗​)⋅ω, v′=v−aωv'=v-a\omegav′=v−aω, v∗′=v∗+aωv_*'=v_*+a\omegav∗′​=v∗​+aω. The hard-sphere collision operator is

Q(F,F)(v)=∫R3×S2∣a∣ (F(v′)F(v∗′)−F(v)F(v∗)) dv∗ dω,Q(F,F)(v)=\int_{\mathbb R^3\times S^2}|a|\,\big(F(v')F(v_*')-F(v)F(v_*)\big)\,dv_*\,d\omega ,Q(F,F)(v)=∫R3×S2​∣a∣(F(v′)F(v∗′​)−F(v)F(v∗​))dv∗​dω,

with ordinary surface measure on S2S^2S2; the two terms are the gain and the loss. The Cauchy problem is (∂t+v⋅∇x)F=Q(F,F)(\partial_t+v\cdot\nabla_x)F=Q(F,F)(∂t​+v⋅∇x​)F=Q(F,F), F(0)=F0F(0)=F_0F(0)=F0​. An initial datum has finite entropy if it is nonnegative and ∫ΩF0(1+∣v∣2+∣log⁡F0∣)<∞\int_\Omega F_0(1+|v|^2+|\log F_0|)<\infty∫Ω​F0​(1+∣v∣2+∣logF0​∣)<∞.

A solution is admissible (Definition 2.1 of the source) if, with M(v)=(2π)−3/2e−∣v∣2/2M(v)=(2\pi)^{-3/2}e^{-|v|^2/2}M(v)=(2π)−3/2e−∣v∣2/2:

  • it is renormalized: the equation holds weakly for Mβ(F/M)M\beta(F/M)Mβ(F/M) for every C1C^1C1 β\betaβ with β(0)=0\beta(0)=0β(0)=0 and ∣β′(z)∣≤Cβ/(1+z)|\beta'(z)|\le C_\beta/(1+z)∣β′(z)∣≤Cβ​/(1+z), and the separately renormalized gain and loss are integrable on bounded time intervals;
  • it is weakly continuous in L1L^1L1 against every bounded measurable test and takes the initial value F0F_0F0​;
  • mass, energy and absolute entropy stay bounded on bounded time intervals;
  • it conserves local mass and total momentum, and satisfies the energy inequality and the relative-entropy inequality with the full entropy dissipation at every time.

Formalization targets

Goal: two admissible solutions from one datum (Theorem 1.1)

There is a nonnegative finite-entropy datum F0F_0F0​ with bounded velocity support, two admissible global solutions F,GF,GF,G with initial datum F0F_0F0​, and a time T>0T>0T>0 such that

F,G∈C([0,T];L1(Ω)),Q±(F), Q±(G)∈L1([0,T]×Ω),F(t)≠G(t) in L1 for some t∈[0,T].F,G\in C([0,T];L^1(\Omega)),\qquad Q^\pm(F),\,Q^\pm(G)\in L^1([0,T]\times\Omega),\qquad F(t)\neq G(t)\ \text{in } L^1 \text{ for some } t\in[0,T].F,G∈C([0,T];L1(Ω)),Q±(F),Q±(G)∈L1([0,T]×Ω),F(t)=G(t) in L1 for some t∈[0,T].

This is Theorem 1.1 of the source (p. 3), with the difference placed in the common interval of strong continuity, which is where the source establishes it. The goal is published on the platform with status Open: no machine-checked proof exists yet.

Significance

The result itself. If the source's proof is correct, the theorem shows that the DiPerna–Lions framework, even with local mass conservation, momentum conservation and the energy and entropy inequalities retained, does not determine the evolution uniquely. The example is spatially inhomogeneous and periodic, and the two solutions start from exactly the same datum, unlike ill-posedness results that compare nearby data. On the interval where they differ, both solutions satisfy the unrenormalized equation. The datum has bounded velocities but unbounded amplitudes concentrated at smaller and smaller spatial scales, which points to the kind of extra control a uniqueness theorem has to impose.

Formalizing it. The statement fixes a long list of admissibility conditions. Its definitions are a useful contribution in their own right: renormalized solutions, entropy dissipation and kinetic test functions on the torus are not in Mathlib. The 65-page proof (colored decompositions, Carleman representation, velocity averaging, a dilation limit and a branching analysis) is a long-term target. Its propositions are natural milestones.

Difficulty

Constructing two different weak limits is not the hard part: approximations with and without a small "hot seed" give two candidate solutions. The difficulty is to show that they really differ. A vanishing seed can produce a hit on the a priori cap that carries arbitrarily little mass, and weak compactness can erase it in the limit. The source must rule out this loss of information uniformly as the cold velocity distributions collapse onto an axis, where the weight controlling the hot density is singular. At the same time every admissibility condition, including the entropy-dissipation inequality and local mass conservation, has to survive the limits. Energy-increasing constructions (Wennberg) and homogeneous examples do not meet these constraints.

Formalization scope

  • Velocities live in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin 3), positions in Fin 3 → AddCircle 1, and densities are real functions on phase space. The sphere carries (volume).toSphere, which is ordinary surface area, not a probability measure.
  • gain and loss are Bochner integrals. To prevent them from silently returning 000 on non-integrable fibers, AdmissibleGlobal requires fiberwise integrability and space-time integrability of the renormalized gain and loss.
  • AdmissibleGlobal f₀ F encodes Definition 2.1: finite entropy at each time, a.e. initial value, weak continuity against bounded measurable tests, uniform moment bounds, the renormalized equation for all Renormalization β\betaβ and all smooth periodic KineticTest φ\varphiφ, local mass conservation against MassTest, total momentum conservation, the energy inequality, and the entropy inequality in ℝ≥0∞ with the lower semicontinuous extension of (A−B)log⁡(A/B)(A-B)\log(A/B)(A−B)log(A/B).
  • StrongEarly T F adds T>0T>0T>0, strong L1L^1L1 continuity on [0,T][0,T][0,T] via eLpNorm, and integrability of gain and loss on [0,T][0,T][0,T]. Distinctness is ¬ (F t =ᵐ G t) for some t∈[0,T]t\in[0,T]t∈[0,T].
  • Infrastructure needed: averaging lemmas, renormalized-solution compactness, the Carleman representation, and estimates on free transport on the torus. Contributions to any of these are welcome.

Selected references

  • R. J. DiPerna and P.-L. Lions, On the Cauchy problem for Boltzmann equations: global existence and weak stability, Ann. of Math. 130 (1989), 321–366. https://doi.org/10.2307/1971423
  • R. J. DiPerna and P.-L. Lions, Global solutions of Boltzmann's equation and the entropy inequality, Arch. Ration. Mech. Anal. 114 (1991), 47–55. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF00375684
  • C. D. Levermore and N. Masmoudi, From the Boltzmann equation to an incompressible Navier–Stokes–Fourier system, Arch. Ration. Mech. Anal. 196 (2010), 753–809. https://doi.org/10.1007/s00205-009-0254-5
  • L. Silvestre, Regularity estimates and open problems in kinetic equations, arXiv:2204.06401 (2022). https://doi.org/10.48550/arXiv.2204.06401
  • S. Kaniel and M. Shinbrot, The Boltzmann equation. I. Uniqueness and local existence, Comm. Math. Phys. 58 (1978), 65–84. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01624788
  • S. Ukai, On the existence of global solutions of mixed problem for non-linear Boltzmann equation, Proc. Japan Acad. 50 (1974), 179–184. https://doi.org/10.3792/pja/1195519027
  • S. Mischler and B. Wennberg, On the spatially homogeneous Boltzmann equation, Ann. Inst. H. Poincaré C 16 (1999), 467–501. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0294-1449(99)80025-0
  • B. Wennberg, An example of nonuniqueness for solutions to the homogeneous Boltzmann equation, J. Stat. Phys. 95 (1999), 469–477. https://doi.org/10.1023/A:1004546031908
  • F. Golse, P.-L. Lions, B. Perthame and R. Sentis, Regularity of the moments of the solution of a transport equation, J. Funct. Anal. 76 (1988), 110–125. https://doi.org/10.1016/0022-1236(88)90051-1
  • X. Chen and J. Holmer, Well/ill-posedness bifurcation for the Boltzmann equation with constant collision kernel, Ann. PDE 10 (2024), Art. 14. https://doi.org/10.1007/s40818-024-00177-w
  • X. Chen, Y. Guo, S. Shen and Z. Zhang, Sharp HxsH^s_xHxs​ ill-posedness of the hard-sphere Boltzmann equation, arXiv:2606.01331 (2026). https://doi.org/10.48550/arXiv.2606.01331
  • N. Gismondi, W. Golding and M. Novack, A sharp rigidity/flexibility threshold for the isotropic Landau equation, arXiv:2608.13758 (2026). https://doi.org/10.48550/arXiv.2608.13758
  • OpenAI, Nonuniqueness for the periodic hard-sphere Boltzmann equation, OpenAI Math Release preprint, September 23, 2026 (Theorem 1.1, p. 3; Definition 2.1, p. 8). https://github.com/openai/math/blob/adc7f1241b42e322a6451854ab7e4b4c146bf78a/preprints/Nonuniqueness-for-the-periodic-hard-sphere-Boltzmann-equation-September-23-2026/paper.pdf
4 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchProbabilityStochastic Systems+1·Captain: mikedeng1

Some Useful Functions for Functional Limit Theorems 3: The First-Passage-Time Map Is M₁-Continuous and J₁-Continuous at Strictly Increasing PathsResearch Paper

Why first passage times need a continuity theorem

Functional limit theorems in queueing and applied probability are rarely proved from scratch. A limit theorem is established once for a primitive process, such as a random walk, a cumulative input or a renewal-reward process, and then transferred to the quantities of interest through the continuous mapping theorem: if Xn⇒XX_n \Rightarrow XXn​⇒X in a function space and fff is continuous at almost every path of XXX, then f(Xn)⇒f(X)f(X_n) \Rightarrow f(X)f(Xn​)⇒f(X). The method works only if the functions in use are known to be continuous, and in which topology.

Ward Whitt's 1980 paper supplies these facts for composition, addition, the supremum, the reflecting barrier, the inverse or first passage time, and time reversal. This mission covers §7, the first passage time. Its role in applications is direct: the counting process of a renewal process is the first passage time of the partial-sum process. A limit theorem for cumulative work can therefore yield one for the number of completed jobs, and a limit theorem for a cumulative input can yield one for the time it takes to reach a level, when the mapping theorem's hypotheses hold.

Timeline. Skorohod (1956) introduced the topologies J1J_1J1​ and M1M_1M1​ on the space DDD of right-continuous paths with left limits. Vervaat (1972) studied functional central limit theorems for processes with positive drift and their inverses, and Whitt (1971) studied weak convergence of first passage time processes. Whitt's 1980 paper restates M1M_1M1​ continuity (Theorem 7.1) and adds the J1J_1J1​ result: the map is continuous at every strictly increasing path (Theorem 7.2), although it is not J1J_1J1​-continuous on its whole domain.

Setting

A path is a function x:[0,∞)→Rx : [0,\infty) \to \mathbb Rx:[0,∞)→R. It belongs to D=D([0,∞),R)D = D([0,\infty),\mathbb R)D=D([0,∞),R) when it is right-continuous and has a left limit at every t>0t > 0t>0.

  • J1J_1J1​ convergence. On a compact interval [0,b][0,b][0,b], xn→xx_n \to xxn​→x in J1J_1J1​ when there are increasing homeomorphisms λn\lambda_nλn​ of [0,b][0,b][0,b] with sup⁡t∣λn(t)−t∣→0\sup_t |\lambda_n(t) - t| \to 0supt​∣λn​(t)−t∣→0 and sup⁡t∣xn(t)−x(λn(t))∣→0\sup_t |x_n(t) - x(\lambda_n(t))| \to 0supt​∣xn​(t)−x(λn​(t))∣→0. On [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) this is required on [0,b][0,b][0,b] for every bbb at which xxx is continuous.
  • UUU convergence. Uniform convergence on compact subintervals.
  • M1M_1M1​ convergence. The completed graph of xxx on [0,b][0,b][0,b] adds to the graph the vertical segment joining x(t−)x(t-)x(t−) and x(t)x(t)x(t) at each jump. xn→xx_n \to xxn​→x in M1M_1M1​ when the completed graphs admit parametric representations (continuous, order-preserving maps from [0,1][0,1][0,1] onto the completed graph) that are uniformly close in both time and space.
  • The supremum. x↑(t)=sup⁡0≤s≤tx(s)x^{\uparrow}(t) = \sup_{0 \le s \le t} x(s)x↑(t)=sup0≤s≤t​x(s).
  • The domain EEE. The set of x∈Dx \in Dx∈D that are unbounded above and have x(0)≥0x(0) \ge 0x(0)≥0.
  • First passage time. For x∈Ex \in Ex∈E,
x−1(t)=inf⁡{s≥0:x(s)>t},t≥0.x^{-1}(t) = \inf\{s \ge 0 : x(s) > t\}, \qquad t \ge 0.x−1(t)=inf{s≥0:x(s)>t},t≥0.
  • D0D_0D0​. The nondecreasing paths in DDD, and CCC the continuous ones.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 7.2, continuity clause

If xn,x∈Ex_n, x \in Exn​,x∈E, xxx is strictly increasing, and xn→xx_n \to xxn​→x in J1J_1J1​, then

xn−1→x−1(J1).x_n^{-1} \to x^{-1} \quad (J_1).xn−1​→x−1(J1​).

The theorem says that every strictly increasing path is a continuity point of the first passage time map for J1J_1J1​. It fixes no constants, so a sharper variant of a milestone does not invalidate it.

Milestones

  1. J1J_1J1​ convergence implies M1M_1M1​ convergence (§6, p. 80).
  2. The supremum map is M1M_1M1​-continuous on paths with x(0)≥0x(0) \ge 0x(0)≥0 (§6, p. 80, as used in the proof of Theorem 7.1).
  3. x∈Ex \in Ex∈E implies x−1∈E∩D0([0,∞),[0,∞))x^{-1} \in E \cap D_0([0,\infty),[0,\infty))x−1∈E∩D0​([0,∞),[0,∞)) (§7, p. 82).
  4. x↑∈Ex^{\uparrow} \in Ex↑∈E and (x↑)−1=x−1(x^{\uparrow})^{-1} = x^{-1}(x↑)−1=x−1 (proof of Theorem 7.1).
  5. Theorem 7.1. If xn,x∈Ex_n, x \in Exn​,x∈E and xn→xx_n \to xxn​→x in M1M_1M1​, then xn−1→x−1x_n^{-1} \to x^{-1}xn−1​→x−1 in M1M_1M1​.
  6. For strictly increasing x∈Ex \in Ex∈E, x−1x^{-1}x−1 is continuous with x−1(0)=0x^{-1}(0) = 0x−1(0)=0.
  7. M1M_1M1​ convergence to a continuous limit starting at 000 is UUU convergence.
  8. UUU convergence implies J1J_1J1​ convergence.
  9. Theorem 7.4. If cn→∞c_n \to \inftycn​→∞, xn∈Ex_n \in Exn​∈E, cn(xn↑−e)→xc_n(x_n^{\uparrow} - e) \to xcn​(xn↑​−e)→x and cn(xn−1−e)→−xc_n(x_n^{-1} - e) \to -xcn​(xn−1​−e)→−x in J1J_1J1​, then x∈Cx \in Cx∈C.

Significance

The result. Theorem 7.2 lets J1J_1J1​ functional limit theorems pass to first passage times when the limit has strictly increasing paths. The typical case is the fluid limit x(t)=μtx(t) = \mu tx(t)=μt of a cumulative process, with μ>0\mu>0μ>0. Together with the composition results of §3, it supports Theorem 7.3's centered inverse limit: if cn→∞c_n \to \inftycn​→∞, xn∈Ex_n \in Exn​∈E, x(0)=0x(0)=0x(0)=0, xxx has no positive jumps, and cn(xn−e)→xc_n(x_n-e) \to xcn​(xn​−e)→x in J1J_1J1​, then cn(xn−1−e)→−xc_n(x_n^{-1}-e) \to -xcn​(xn−1​−e)→−x in J1J_1J1​. This is one step from a central limit theorem for partial sums to one for counting processes. Theorem 7.4 shows a limitation: convergence of both the centered supremum and the centered inverse in J1J_1J1​ forces a continuous limit.

Formalizing it. The results are proved and classical, but none of them has a machine-checked proof. The mission produces the M1M_1M1​ topology on D([0,∞),R)D([0,\infty),\mathbb R)D([0,∞),R) in Lean, the first passage time map with its basic properties, and the comparison between J1J_1J1​, M1M_1M1​ and UUU. That infrastructure is reused by every later formalization that goes through counting processes or the M1M_1M1​ topology, including the planned wave of §§3–7 corollaries in this series.

Difficulty

The first passage time map is not J1J_1J1​-continuous. On p. 82 the paper gives paths xn→xx_n \to xxn​→x in J1J_1J1​ whose inverses converge only in M1M_1M1​: a flat stretch of the limit becomes a jump of x−1x^{-1}x−1, which the inverses of the approximating paths approach through two separate jumps. Inverting the time changes λn\lambda_nλn​ of the J1J_1J1​ convergence cannot handle that split, because J1J_1J1​ matches jumps one to one. The hypothesis that xxx is strictly increasing excludes flat stretches of the limit. The technical weight lies in completed graphs and their parametric representations, which Mathlib does not have, and in the restriction to compact intervals at continuity points of the limit.

Formalization scope

  • Paths are total functions R→R\mathbb R \to \mathbb RR→R. Only [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) matters, and every statement is on Ici 0. All convergences are sequential, which is equivalent because the spaces are metrizable (Theorem 2.6). Membership of every path in DDD is part of each convergence.
  • J1J_1J1​ is the shared layer of the series: the metric (2.1) with [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]-valued distances, extended to [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) through restrictions to [a,b][a,b][a,b] whose endpoints are continuity points or endpoints.
  • M1M_1M1​ is not defined in the paper. The mission defines it with the convention x(0−):=0x(0-) := 0x(0−):=0 at the origin, so the completed graph on [0,b][0,b][0,b] starts with the segment from (0,0)(0,0)(0,0) to (0,x(0))(0,x(0))(0,x(0)). With the convention x(0−)=x(0)x(0-) = x(0)x(0−)=x(0), Theorem 7.1 is false. For x(s)=(s−1)+x(s) = (s-1)^+x(s)=(s−1)+ and xn=x+1/nx_n = x + 1/nxn​=x+1/n, xn−1x_n^{-1}xn−1​ jumps from 000 to 111 at t=1/nt = 1/nt=1/n while x−1(0)=1x^{-1}(0) = 1x−1(0)=1. The convention is Whitt's later M1′M_1'M1′​. Two milestones carry a hypothesis that this convention forces, and each says so: the supremum milestone requires xn(0),x(0)≥0x_n(0), x(0) \ge 0xn​(0),x(0)≥0 (as on EEE), and the M1⇒UM_1 \Rightarrow UM1​⇒U milestone requires x(0)=0x(0) = 0x(0)=0. The goal, which is stated in J1J_1J1​, does not depend on the convention.
  • x−1x^{-1}x−1 is a real infimum. Its set is nonempty because paths in EEE are unbounded above, so every statement that uses x−1x^{-1}x−1 assumes membership in EEE. The inequality x(s)>tx(s) > tx(s)>t is strict, as on the page.
  • Omitted. The measurability clause of Theorem 7.2 refers to the Borel σ-field of J1J_1J1​, which the series does not build, and it is not stated. Replacing it by measurability for the product σ-algebra would be a different statement. The second clause of the §6 sentence on D0D_0D0​ is also not stated.
  • Ruled out. A formalization in which x−1x^{-1}x−1 is applied outside EEE (giving the junk value 000), or in which J1J_1J1​ convergence omits membership in DDD (making the restriction clause vacuous), would trivialize the goal. Both are excluded.

Contributions welcome: the general theory of parametric representations (existence, and the M1M_1M1​ comparison with J1J_1J1​ and UUU), which is reusable for any M1M_1M1​ result. Alternative proofs of Theorem 7.2 that avoid M1M_1M1​ are also welcome.

Selected references

  • W. Whitt, Some Useful Functions for Functional Limit Theorems, Mathematics of Operations Research 5(1), 1980, 67–85. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.5.1.67
  • A. V. Skorohod, Limit theorems for stochastic processes, Theory of Probability and Its Applications 1(3), 1956, 261–290. https://doi.org/10.1137/1101022
  • W. Whitt, Weak convergence of first passage time processes, Journal of Applied Probability 8(2), 1971, 417–422. https://doi.org/10.2307/3211913
  • W. Vervaat, Functional central limit theorems for processes with positive drift and their inverses, Zeitschrift für Wahrscheinlichkeitstheorie 23, 1972, 245–253. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF00532510
  • W. Whitt, Stochastic-Process Limits, Springer, 2002, §13.6. https://doi.org/10.1007/b97479
14 thms2 active usersReviewed
Algorithmic Game TheoryOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Cooperative Fuzzy Games 3: The Diagonal Formula Is the Unique Continuous Linear Pareto-Optimal, Symmetric and Atomic Value of Smooth Fuzzy GamesResearch Paper

Motivation

A value for cooperative games assigns to every game a payoff vector, chosen by axioms rather than by bargaining. Shapley's value (1953) does this for finite games with side payments, and Aumann and Shapley (Values of Non-Atomic Games, 1974) extended it to games with a continuum of players, where it is given by a diagonal formula: a player's value is the average of their marginal worth along the diagonal from the empty coalition to the grand coalition. Aubin's Cooperative Fuzzy Games (Math. Oper. Res. 6(1), 1981, doi:10.1287/moor.6.1.1) brings this formula to finitely many players who may participate in coalitions at fractional rates, and characterises it by axioms in §8.

The result matters in cost allocation: the Aumann–Shapley price mechanism (Billera, Heath and Raanan 1978; Mirman and Tauman 1982) shares the cost of a bundle of products by exactly this diagonal formula, applied to a smooth cost function of the quantities produced. Theorem 8.1 is the finite-player, fuzzy-coalition version of the axiomatic justification behind that mechanism.

Setting

There are nnn players N={1,…,n}N=\{1,\dots,n\}N={1,…,n}. A fuzzy coalition is a vector τ∈[0,1]n\tau\in[0,1]^nτ∈[0,1]n, where τi\tau_iτi​ is the rate at which player iii participates; an ordinary coalition AAA is its indicator vector τA\tau^AτA, and τN=(1,…,1)\tau^N=(1,\dots,1)τN=(1,…,1) is the grand coalition.

A smooth fuzzy game is a coalitional worth function v:[0,1]n→Rv:[0,1]^n\to\mathbb Rv:[0,1]n→R that is continuously differentiable and satisfies v(0)=0v(0)=0v(0)=0. These form the space VnV^nVn, a Banach space under the C1C^1C1 norm sup⁡[0,1]n∣v∣+sup⁡[0,1]n∥Dv∥\sup_{[0,1]^n}|v|+\sup_{[0,1]^n}\|Dv\|sup[0,1]n​∣v∣+sup[0,1]n​∥Dv∥.

A sequence of fuzzy values is a family of continuous linear operators ψn:Vn→Rn\psi_n:V^n\to\mathbb R^nψn​:Vn→Rn satisfying three axioms.

  • Pareto optimality: ∑i∈N(ψnv)i=v(τN)\sum_{i\in N}(\psi_n v)_i=v(\tau^N)∑i∈N​(ψn​v)i​=v(τN).
  • Symmetry: for a permutation θ\thetaθ of NNN, with (θ∗v)(τ)=v(τθ−1(1),…,τθ−1(n))(\theta^*v)(\tau)=v(\tau_{\theta^{-1}(1)},\dots,\tau_{\theta^{-1}(n)})(θ∗v)(τ)=v(τθ−1(1)​,…,τθ−1(n)​) and (θ∗c)i=cθ(i)(\theta^*c)_i=c_{\theta(i)}(θ∗c)i​=cθ(i)​, one has ψn(θ∗v)=θ∗(ψnv)\psi_n(\theta^*v)=\theta^*(\psi_n v)ψn​(θ∗v)=θ∗(ψn​v).
  • Atomicity: a partition P={A1,…,Am}P=\{A_1,\dots,A_m\}P={A1​,…,Am​} of NNN into nonempty types sends a fuzzy coalition σ∈[0,1]m\sigma\in[0,1]^mσ∈[0,1]m of types to the fuzzy coalition (P⋅σ)i=σj(P\cdot\sigma)_i=\sigma_j(P⋅σ)i​=σj​ for i∈Aji\in A_ji∈Aj​, and an nnn-player game vvv to the mmm-type game (P∗v)(σ)=v(P⋅σ)(P^*v)(\sigma)=v(P\cdot\sigma)(P∗v)(σ)=v(P⋅σ). The axiom requires ψm(P∗v)j=∑i∈Aj(ψnv)i\psi_m(P^*v)_j=\sum_{i\in A_j}(\psi_nv)_iψm​(P∗v)j​=∑i∈Aj​​(ψn​v)i​: a type receives what its members receive.

The core of a game vvv with side payments is the set of c∈Rnc\in\mathbb R^nc∈Rn with ∑ici=v(τN)\sum_ic_i=v(\tau^N)∑i​ci​=v(τN) and ∑iτici≥v(τ)\sum_i\tau_ic_i\ge v(\tau)∑i​τi​ci​≥v(τ) for every τ∈[0,1]n\tau\in[0,1]^nτ∈[0,1]n (§2 (4)).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 8.1

There exists a unique sequence of fuzzy values, given by the diagonal formula

ψnv=∫01Dv(tτN) dt(v∈Vn).(4)\psi_n v=\int_0^1 Dv(t\tau^N)\,dt\qquad(v\in V^n).\tag{4}ψn​v=∫01​Dv(tτN)dt(v∈Vn).(4)

For every linear A:Rm→RnA:\mathbb R^m\to\mathbb R^nA:Rm→Rn with AτM=τNA\tau^M=\tau^NAτM=τN,

ψm(v∘A)=A∗ψnv(v∈Vn),(5)\psi_m(v\circ A)=A^*\psi_n v\qquad(v\in V^n),\tag{5}ψm​(v∘A)=A∗ψn​v(v∈Vn),(5)

where A∗A^*A∗ is the transpose of AAA. If v∈Vnv\in V^nv∈Vn is concave and positively homogeneous, then ψnv\psi_nvψn​v is the unique element of the core.

Milestones

These are the steps of the proof in the paper (pp. 10–11), in attack order:

  1. the maps (4) are linear, continuous and satisfy (5);
  2. they satisfy the Pareto optimality, symmetry and atomicity axioms;
  3. the monomials τ1k1⋯τnkn\tau_1^{k_1}\cdots\tau_n^{k_n}τ1k1​​⋯τnkn​​ (k≠0k\ne0k=0) span a dense subspace of VnV^nVn;
  4. Pareto optimality and symmetry force ψn(τ1⋯τn)=1nτN\psi_n(\tau_1\cdots\tau_n)=\frac1n\tau^Nψn​(τ1​⋯τn​)=n1​τN;
  5. the three axioms force (ψnτk)i=ki/(k1+⋯+kn)(\psi_n\tau^k)_i=k_i/(k_1+\dots+k_n)(ψn​τk)i​=ki​/(k1​+⋯+kn​), which is also the value of (4);
  6. for positively homogeneous vvv, Dv(tτN)=Dv(τN)Dv(t\tau^N)=Dv(\tau^N)Dv(tτN)=Dv(τN), so ψnv=Dv(τN)\psi_nv=Dv(\tau^N)ψn​v=Dv(τN);
  7. (Remark 8.2) ψn\psi_nψn​ applied to Owen's multilinear extension of a game with side payments is its Shapley value.

Significance

The result. Theorem 8.1 singles out the diagonal formula among all ways of valuing smooth fuzzy games, using only efficiency, anonymity and invariance under merging players into types. Property (5) shows that the value transforms correctly under every linear change of coordinates fixing the grand coalition. The core statement links the value to stability: for concave homogeneous games (for instance, market games), the value is the only allocation no fuzzy coalition can improve upon. Through Owen's extension, the classical Shapley value is recovered as a special case.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved in the paper, briefly, and its proof leans on an unproved density claim and on a short appeal to atomicity. A formalization makes the uniqueness argument complete: in particular, how atomicity, which only allows nonempty types, determines the value of a monomial in which some player has exponent 000. No machine-checked version of the Aumann–Shapley diagonal formula or its axiomatisation is known to us. Mathlib has the Stone–Weierstrass theorem for continuous functions but no C1C^1C1 density of polynomials on a cube; the latter is reusable well beyond game theory.

Difficulty

Existence (milestones 1–2) is calculus: differentiation under the integral sign and the chain rule. The difficulty sits in uniqueness. The first idea, computing ψn\psi_nψn​ on monomials by symmetry alone, fails as soon as the exponents differ: symmetry relates only games that are permutations of each other. Atomicity relates games with different numbers of players, and its types must be nonempty, so a player with exponent 000 cannot simply be merged away. Uniqueness on all of VnV^nVn then needs density of polynomials in the C1C^1C1 norm, not merely the uniform norm: without continuity in the C1C^1C1 norm, linear maps that agree on polynomials can disagree elsewhere, and the theorem is false.

Formalization scope

  • Players are Fin n, fuzzy coalitions and payoff vectors are Fin n → ℝ, and the cube is Set.Icc 0 1 in the product order.
  • VnV^nVn is a submodule of functions on all of Rn\mathbb R^nRn that are C1C^1C1 there and vanish at 000. Every C1C^1C1 function on the cube extends to such a function, and only values and derivatives on the cube enter the norm and the axioms. The global domain makes v∘Av\circ Av∘A meaningful for every linear AAA.
  • "Continuous" means ∥ψnv∥≤C ∥v∥C1\|\psi_nv\|\le C\,\|v\|_{C^1}∥ψn​v∥≤C∥v∥C1​ with the C1C^1C1 seminorm of the cube (sup norm on Rn\mathbb R^nRn, operator norm on DvDvDv). This is the continuity of the Banach space VnV^nVn. Continuity for the uniform norm alone would make formula (4) discontinuous, and dropping continuity would make uniqueness false.
  • The axioms are stated for all n≥1n\ge1n≥1; the paper's "∀n∈N\forall n\in N∀n∈N" in the symmetry axiom is read as n≥1n\ge1n≥1. In the atomicity axiom (3), the paper's "∀v∈Vm\forall v\in V^m∀v∈Vm" is read as v∈Vnv\in V^nv∈Vn, because P∗vP^*vP∗v is defined by (2) for an nnn-player game. A partition into nonempty types is a surjection Fin n → Fin m. The symbols τθ−1(i)\tau_{\theta-1(i)}τθ−1(i)​ are τθ−1(i)\tau_{\theta^{-1}(i)}τθ−1(i)​.
  • The games θ∗v\theta^*vθ∗v, P∗vP^*vP∗v and v∘Av\circ Av∘A are passed as elements of VnV^nVn, VmV^mVm together with their defining identities; they always lie in those spaces.
  • In the core statement, concavity and positive homogeneity (v(tτ)=tv(τ)v(t\tau)=tv(\tau)v(tτ)=tv(τ) for t>0t>0t>0, τ≥0\tau\ge0τ≥0) are required on the orthant R+n\mathbb R^n_+R+n​, to which §2 (2) extends vvv; the core quantifies over the cube, as in §2 (4)(a). The paper's "VNV^NVN" there is VnV^nVn.
  • Remark 8.2 is stated for games defined on all coalitions with v(∅)=0v(\emptyset)=0v(∅)=0, since formula (7) uses v(A∖{i})v(A\setminus\{i\})v(A∖{i}) for every AAA. The Shapley value is the published platform definition Supermodularity.Cooperative.ShapleyValue, whose formula is (7) re-indexed by S=A∖{i}S=A\setminus\{i\}S=A∖{i}. The Cornet extension of the same remark is left out because it is not C1C^1C1 on the boundary of the cube.
  • A trivializing reading is ruled out: the goal asserts both existence of a sequence satisfying all axioms with C1C^1C1 continuity and uniqueness among all such sequences, so neither an empty axiom system nor a vacuous continuity requirement makes it hold.

Infrastructure that a complete development needs, and that is welcome as separate contributions: C1C^1C1 approximation of functions on a cube by polynomials; differentiation under the integral sign for the diagonal integral; Euler's identity and the supergradient inequality for concave homogeneous C1C^1C1 functions.

Selected references

  • J.-P. Aubin, Cooperative Fuzzy Games, Mathematics of Operations Research 6(1) (1981) 1–13. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.6.1.1
  • R. J. Aumann and L. S. Shapley, Values of Non-Atomic Games, Princeton University Press, 1974. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400867080
  • L. S. Shapley, A Value for n-Person Games, in Contributions to the Theory of Games II, Annals of Mathematics Studies 28 (1953) 307–317. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400881970-018
  • G. Owen, Multilinear Extensions of Games, Management Science 18(5) (1972) P64–P79. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.18.5.64
  • L. J. Billera, D. C. Heath and J. Raanan, Internal Telephone Billing Rates — A Novel Application of Non-Atomic Game Theory, Operations Research 26(6) (1978) 956–965. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.26.6.956
  • L. J. Mirman and Y. Tauman, Demand Compatible Equitable Cost Sharing Prices, Mathematics of Operations Research 7(1) (1982) 40–56. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.7.1.40
12 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Implicit Renewal Theory and Tails of Solutions of Random Equations 3: Rate of Approach — t^κP(R > t) Equals C₊ Minus a Contour Integral Plus O(t^{−β/2})Research Paper

Motivation

Random equations of the form R=LΨ(R)R \overset{\mathcal L}{=} \Psi(R)R=LΨ(R), with Ψ\PsiΨ a random function independent of RRR, describe the stationary laws of many stochastic recursions: perpetuities in insurance and finance, the stationary law of ARCH-type volatility models, random difference equations R=Q+MRR = Q + MRR=Q+MR, and the stationary workload of certain queueing and storage models. When Ψ(t)\Psi(t)Ψ(t) acts like multiplication by a random variable MMM for large ∣t∣|t|∣t∣, and E∣M∣κ=1\mathbf E|M|^\kappa = 1E∣M∣κ=1 for some κ>0\kappa > 0κ>0, the solution has power-law tails: P(R>t)∼C+t−κP(R > t) \sim C_+ t^{-\kappa}P(R>t)∼C+​t−κ. This is the implicit renewal theorem of Goldie (Ann. Appl. Probab. 1991, Theorem 2.3), which recovers and extends Kesten's 1973 theorem on random difference equations.

A tail asymptotic alone says nothing about how fast tκP(R>t)t^\kappa P(R > t)tκP(R>t) approaches C+C_+C+​. For tail estimation, for the accuracy of extreme-quantile approximations used in risk management, and for second-order regular variation, the rate matters. Section 3 of the same paper answers this: under an exponential moment condition slightly beyond the Cramér condition, the error has an explicit second-order term determined by the zeros of 1−η^1 - \hat\eta1−η^​, where η\etaη is a tilted law of log⁡M\log MlogM, plus a remainder O(t−β/2)O(t^{-\beta/2})O(t−β/2).

Timeline: Kesten (1973) proved power tails for random difference equations; Grincevičius (1975) developed an implicit-renewal approach; Stone (1966) decomposed exponentially decaying renewal measures into an absolutely continuous part with explicit asymptotics and a finite part; Ganelius (1962) proved the Tauberian remainder theorem used to unsmooth; Goldie (1991) combined these into the rate result formalized here.

Setting

Let (Ω,A,P)(\Omega, \mathcal A, P)(Ω,A,P) be a probability space carrying independent real random variables M≥0M \ge 0M≥0 and RRR. Fix κ>0\kappa > 0κ>0 with EMκ=1\mathbf E M^\kappa = 1EMκ=1 (the Cramér condition, (2.3)) and β>0\beta > 0β>0 with EMκ+β<∞\mathbf E M^{\kappa+\beta} < \inftyEMκ+β<∞ (3.3).

The tilted law of MMM is the probability measure η(dx)=eκxP(log⁡M∈dx)\eta(dx) = e^{\kappa x} P(\log M \in dx)η(dx)=eκxP(logM∈dx) on R\mathbb RR, computed on {M>0}\{M > 0\}{M>0}. Its transforms are η~(β)=∫eβtη(dt)\tilde\eta(\beta) = \int e^{\beta t}\eta(dt)η~​(β)=∫eβtη(dt) for real β\betaβ and η^(θ)=∫eiθtη(dt)\hat\eta(\theta) = \int e^{i\theta t}\eta(dt)η^​(θ)=∫eiθtη(dt) for complex θ\thetaθ; for a function fff, f^(θ)=∫eiθtf(t) dt\hat f(\theta) = \int e^{i\theta t} f(t)\,dtf^​(θ)=∫eiθtf(t)dt. Convolution powers are η(0)=δ0\eta^{(0)} = \delta_0η(0)=δ0​, η(n+1)=η(n)∗η\eta^{(n+1)} = \eta^{(n)} * \etaη(n+1)=η(n)∗η, and the renewal measure is ν=∑n≥0η(n)\nu = \sum_{n \ge 0}\eta^{(n)}ν=∑n≥0​η(n). A law is spread out when some convolution power has a nonzero absolutely continuous component; (3.4) asks this of the conditional law of log⁡M\log MlogM given M≠0M \ne 0M=0.

Set m=EMκlog⁡Mm = \mathbf E M^\kappa \log Mm=EMκlogM and

g1(t)=eκt(P(R>et)−P(MR>et)),C+=1m∫0∞(P(R>t)−P(MR>t))tκ−1 dt,g_1(t) = e^{\kappa t}\big(P(R > e^t) - P(MR > e^t)\big), \qquad C_+ = \frac1m\int_0^\infty \big(P(R > t) - P(MR > t)\big) t^{\kappa - 1}\,dt,g1​(t)=eκt(P(R>et)−P(MR>et)),C+​=m1​∫0∞​(P(R>t)−P(MR>t))tκ−1dt,

with g−1g_{-1}g−1​ and C−C_-C−​ defined the same way for the lower tail. The strip is D={θ:−β<ℑθ<0}D = \{\theta : -\beta < \Im\theta < 0\}D={θ:−β<ℑθ<0}, and C\mathscr CC denotes a positively oriented closed contour in DDD enclosing every zero of 1−η^1 - \hat\eta1−η^​ in DDD.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.2

If, in addition, η(n0)=(1−δ)φ0+δφ1\eta^{(n_0)} = (1 - \delta)\varphi_0 + \delta\varphi_1η(n0​)=(1−δ)φ0​+δφ1​ for some n0n_0n0​, with δ∈[0,1)\delta \in [0, 1)δ∈[0,1), φ0\varphi_0φ0​ absolutely continuous and δφ~1(β)<1\delta\tilde\varphi_1(\beta) < 1δφ~​1​(β)<1, and η^≠1\hat\eta \ne 1η^​=1 on ℑθ=−β\Im\theta = -\betaℑθ=−β, then ∫0∞∣P(R>t)−P(MR>t)∣ tκ+β−1dt<∞\int_0^\infty |P(R > t) - P(MR > t)|\,t^{\kappa+\beta-1}dt < \infty∫0∞​∣P(R>t)−P(MR>t)∣tκ+β−1dt<∞ implies

tκP(R>t)=C+−12π ℜ∮Ce−iθlog⁡t g^1(θ)1−η^(θ) dθ+O(t−β/2),t→∞,t^\kappa P(R > t) = C_+ - \frac1{2\pi}\,\Re\oint_{\mathscr C} e^{-i\theta\log t}\,\frac{\hat g_1(\theta)}{1 - \hat\eta(\theta)}\,d\theta + O(t^{-\beta/2}), \qquad t \to \infty,tκP(R>t)=C+​−2π1​ℜ∮C​e−iθlogt1−η^​(θ)g^​1​(θ)​dθ+O(t−β/2),t→∞,

with the analogous statement for P(R<−t)P(R < -t)P(R<−t); and if R=LΨ(R)R \overset{\mathcal L}{=} \Psi(R)R=LΨ(R) with RRR independent of (M,Ψ)(M, \Psi)(M,Ψ), the integrability hypotheses may be replaced by E∣(Ψ(R)±)κ+β−((MR)±)κ+β∣<∞\mathbf E|(\Psi(R)^\pm)^{\kappa+\beta} - ((MR)^\pm)^{\kappa+\beta}| < \inftyE∣(Ψ(R)±)κ+β−((MR)±)κ+β∣<∞. The theorem also asserts that η\etaη is a spread-out probability measure.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 9.5: Stone's inversion formula for the density of ∑nχ∗μ(n)\sum_n \chi * \mu^{(n)}∑n​χ∗μ(n).
  2. Theorem 3.1: the renewal measure splits as ν=ν0+ν1\nu = \nu_0 + \nu_1ν=ν0​+ν1​, ν1\nu_1ν1​ finite with ν~1(β)<∞\tilde\nu_1(\beta) < \inftyν~1​(β)<∞, ν0\nu_0ν0​ with continuous bounded density
p(t)=1m−12π∮Ce−iθtdθ1−η^(θ)+o(e−βt).p(t) = \frac1m - \frac1{2\pi}\oint_{\mathscr C} e^{-i\theta t}\frac{d\theta}{1 - \hat\eta(\theta)} + o(e^{-\beta t}).p(t)=m1​−2π1​∮C​e−iθt1−η^​(θ)dθ​+o(e−βt).
  1. (9.23) and (9.24): the smoothed identity and the smoothed rate K∗ℜr1(t)=o(e−βt)K * \Re r_1(t) = o(e^{-\beta t})K∗ℜr1​(t)=o(e−βt) for the kernel K(t)=be−bt1t>0K(t) = be^{-bt}\mathbf 1_{t>0}K(t)=be−bt1t>0​.
  2. Theorem 9.6: the Beurling–Ganelius Tauberian remainder theorem.

Significance

Theorem 3.2 turns the first-order tail asymptotic of the implicit renewal theorem into an expansion: the second-order terms are finitely many terms of the form (log⁡t)j−1tℑθl(\log t)^{j-1}t^{\Im\theta_l}(logt)j−1tℑθl​ times oscillating factors, one family for each zero θl\theta_lθl​ of 1−η^1 - \hat\eta1−η^​ with 0<−ℑθl≤β/20 < -\Im\theta_l \le \beta/20<−ℑθl​≤β/2, and their form does not depend on the unknown law of RRR. It applies to every random equation covered by the implicit renewal theorem once the stronger moment condition holds, including perpetuities and the random difference equation. Theorem 3.1 is of independent use: it is an explicit-rate version of Stone's decomposition of renewal measures with exponential moments.

The results are proved in the paper; none is formalized. Mathlib has the Fourier transform on the real line, convolution of measures, and rectangle Cauchy theorems, but no renewal theory, no Stone decomposition, and no Tauberian remainder theorem. Formalizing the mission produces a machine-checked renewal density expansion and a checked Beurling–Ganelius theorem, both reusable outside this paper.

Difficulty

The first-order theorem follows from the key renewal theorem applied to r(t)=eκtP(R>et)r(t) = e^{\kappa t}P(R > e^t)r(t)=eκtP(R>et). That route gives no rate: the key renewal theorem has no remainder, and the integrability hypothesis yields eβtg1∈L1e^{\beta t}g_1 \in L^1eβtg1​∈L1 but not eβtg1(t)=o(1)e^{\beta t}g_1(t) = o(1)eβtg1​(t)=o(1), so a remainder cannot be read off directly even with a spread-out step law. The proof therefore works with a smoothed version of rrr, where Stone's decomposition with the contour expansion of the renewal density gives an o(e−βt)o(e^{-\beta t})o(e−βt) remainder, and has to unsmooth. Unsmoothing is the Tauberian step: it requires a one-sided regularity condition on the unsmoothed function, verified for rrr and for the contour term, and costs half the exponent. The contour expansion itself requires showing that 1−η^1 - \hat\eta1−η^​ has finitely many zeros in the strip and handling their orders through residues.

Formalization scope

All objects live in the namespace GoldieRenewal.Rates. Random variables are measurable maps Ω→R\Omega \to \mathbb RΩ→R on a probability space; M≥0M \ge 0M≥0 almost surely; independence is IndepFun. Tail probabilities are real numbers P.real {ω | t < R ω}. Moments such as EMκ+β\mathbf E M^{\kappa+\beta}EMκ+β and μ~(β)\tilde\mu(\beta)μ~​(β) are lower Lebesgue integrals in [0,∞][0, \infty][0,∞]. The transforms μ^\hat\muμ^​ and f^\hat ff^​ are Bochner integrals at complex arguments with the +i+i+i sign of the paper. Asymptotic statements use Asymptotics.IsBigO and IsLittleO along atTop.

The contour. A contour C\mathscr CC is the positively oriented boundary of an axis-parallel rectangle whose closure lies in DDD and whose interior contains every zero of 1−η^1 - \hat\eta1−η^​ in DDD; the contour integral is the sum of the four edge integrals (RectangleIntegral, from the published ResidueCalcOnRectangles_defs). Expansions are stated for every such rectangle.

The variable in (3.8) and (3.10). The paper prints e−iθte^{-i\theta t}e−iθt in the contour term, but its proof establishes the expansion in the logarithmic variable s=log⁡ts = \log ts=logt. The targets are stated with e−iθlog⁡te^{-i\theta\log t}e−iθlogt, which is what the proof gives. With the printed e−iθte^{-i\theta t}e−iθt the contour term would decay exponentially and the statement would claim tκP(R>t)=C++O(t−β/2)t^\kappa P(R > t) = C_+ + O(t^{-\beta/2})tκP(R>t)=C+​+O(t−β/2), which is not what is proved. Hypothesis (3.7) is printed with P(R>−t)P(R > -t)P(R>−t) and is read with P(R>t)P(R > t)P(R>t).

Excluded trivializations. The contour term may not be dropped; the hypotheses do not exclude zeros of 1−η^1 - \hat\eta1−η^​ in DDD; and the contour must enclose all zeros in the strip, not a chosen subset.

Theorem 9.6 is stated for a complex-valued kernel and a finite strip width aaa; the application with a=∞a = \inftya=∞ follows by restricting to a finite strip. Lemma 9.5 carries an added hypothesis that the density of χ\chiχ has compact support, which the proof uses and the application provides.

Contributions welcome: renewal-measure infrastructure (convolution powers, Blackwell-type limits), Fourier analysis of measures at complex arguments, residue computations on rectangles, and Tauberian remainder theory. Each is reusable well beyond this paper.

Selected references

  • C. M. Goldie, Implicit renewal theory and tails of solutions of random equations, Ann. Appl. Probab. 1(1):126–166, 1991. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoap/1177005985
  • H. Kesten, Random difference equations and renewal theory for products of random matrices, Acta Math. 131:207–248, 1973. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02392040
  • C. Stone, On absolutely continuous components and renewal theory, Ann. Math. Statist. 37(1):271–275, 1966. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177699617
  • T. H. Ganelius, The remainder in Wiener's Tauberian theorem, Acta Univ. Gothoburgensis, Mathematica Gothoburgensia 1, 1962 (cited in Goldie 1991).
  • A. K. Grincevičius, One limit distribution for a random walk on the line, Lithuanian Math. J. 15:580–589, 1975 (cited in Goldie 1991).
12 thms2 active usersReviewed
Harmonic AnalysisProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Distribution Function Inequalities for Martingales 3: For Brownian Motion Stopped at Any Stopping Time τ, EΦ(X*(τ)) and EΦ(τ^{1/2}) Are ComparableResearch Paper

Motivation

The size of a martingale can be measured in two ways: by its maximal function, the largest absolute value it reaches, and by a quadratic quantity that records how much it has moved, the square function in discrete time or the elapsed time in the case of Brownian motion. The Burkholder–Davis–Gundy inequalities say that these two measurements are comparable in every LpL^pLp norm and, more generally, under EΦ(⋅)E\Phi(\cdot)EΦ(⋅) for every Φ\PhiΦ of moderate growth. They are a basic tool of stochastic analysis, harmonic analysis and the theory of stochastic integration.

D. L. Burkholder's 1971 Wald Memorial Lectures, published as Distribution Function Inequalities for Martingales (Ann. Probability 1 (1973)), organise these results around one device: a distribution function inequality ("good-λ\lambdaλ" inequality) between two random variables, which a single lemma then converts into integral inequalities for all Φ\PhiΦ of moderate growth. The paper opens its second chapter with "a particularly easy but important special case": Brownian motion stopped at an arbitrary stopping time. This mission formalizes that case, §§6–8 of the paper.

Timeline. Burkholder proved the LpL^pLp square-function inequalities for martingales, 1<p<∞1<p<\infty1<p<∞, in 1966 (Ann. Math. Statist. 37); B. Davis extended the comparison of the maximal and square functions to p=1p=1p=1 in 1970 (Israel J. Math. 8); Burkholder and R. F. Gundy introduced the extrapolation method for operators on martingales in 1970 (Acta Math. 124); Burkholder, Davis and Gundy proved two-sided Φ\PhiΦ inequalities in 1972 (Proc. Sixth Berkeley Symp. 2, 223–240), the Brownian case being their Theorem 7.2, under the additional assumption that Φ\PhiΦ is the integral of a function that itself satisfies a growth condition. The 1973 paper states Theorem 6.1 below as "Theorem 7.2 of [6] with Φ\PhiΦ more general", that assumption removed.

Setting

Let (Ω,A,P)(\Omega,\mathcal A,P)(Ω,A,P) be a probability space and X={X(t), 0≤t<∞}X=\{X(t),\,0\le t<\infty\}X={X(t),0≤t<∞} a one-dimensional Brownian motion: a real process with independent increments and continuous sample functions, with X(t)X(t)X(t) normally distributed, EX(t)=0EX(t)=0EX(t)=0, EX2(t)=tEX^2(t)=tEX2(t)=t. Let B(t)\mathcal B(t)B(t) be the σ\sigmaσ-field generated by {X(s), 0≤s≤t}\{X(s),\,0\le s\le t\}{X(s),0≤s≤t}. A stopping time of XXX is a function τ:Ω→[0,∞]\tau:\Omega\to[0,\infty]τ:Ω→[0,∞] with {τ<t}∈B(t)\{\tau<t\}\in\mathcal B(t){τ<t}∈B(t) for every t>0t>0t>0. For 0≤b≤∞0\le b\le\infty0≤b≤∞ put

X∗(b)=sup⁡t≥0∣X(b∧t)∣,X^*(b)=\sup_{t\ge0}|X(b\wedge t)| ,X∗(b)=t≥0sup​∣X(b∧t)∣,

so X∗(τ)X^*(\tau)X∗(τ) is the maximal function of Brownian motion stopped at τ\tauτ.

A function Φ:[0,∞]→[0,∞]\Phi:[0,\infty]\to[0,\infty]Φ:[0,∞]→[0,∞] is of moderate growth if it is non-decreasing and continuous, Φ(0)=0\Phi(0)=0Φ(0)=0, and

Φ(2λ)≤c(6.1) Φ(λ),λ>0.(6.1)\Phi(2\lambda)\le c_{(6.1)}\,\Phi(\lambda),\qquad\lambda>0. \tag{6.1}Φ(2λ)≤c(6.1)​Φ(λ),λ>0.(6.1)

Examples are Φ(λ)=λp\Phi(\lambda)=\lambda^pΦ(λ)=λp for 0<p<∞0<p<\infty0<p<∞. No convexity is assumed. In Lean these are IsBM X P, IsStoppingTimeOf X τ, maxStopped X b ω and IsPhi Φ c.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6.1

For every stopping time τ\tauτ of XXX,

c EΦ(τ1/2)≤EΦ(X∗(τ))≤C EΦ(τ1/2),(6.2)c\,E\Phi(\tau^{1/2})\le E\Phi(X^*(\tau))\le C\,E\Phi(\tau^{1/2}), \tag{6.2}cEΦ(τ1/2)≤EΦ(X∗(τ))≤CEΦ(τ1/2),(6.2)

where c,C>0c,C>0c,C>0 depend only on c(6.1)c_{(6.1)}c(6.1)​. Neither τ\tauτ nor any moment is assumed finite.

Milestones

  1. (8.1) Wald's identity EX2(τ)=EτEX^2(\tau)=E\tauEX2(τ)=Eτ for a bounded stopping time τ\tauτ (cited in the paper from Doob).
  2. Theorem 6.2. For β>1\beta>1β>1, δ>0\delta>0δ>0 and every λ>0\lambda>0λ>0,
P(τ1/2>βλ, X∗(τ)≤δλ)≤δ2β2−1P(τ1/2>λ),(6.3)P(\tau^{1/2}>\beta\lambda,\ X^*(\tau)\le\delta\lambda)\le\frac{\delta^2}{\beta^2-1}P(\tau^{1/2}>\lambda), \tag{6.3}P(τ1/2>βλ, X∗(τ)≤δλ)≤β2−1δ2​P(τ1/2>λ),(6.3) P(X∗(τ)>βλ, τ1/2≤δλ)≤δ2(β−1)2P(X∗(τ)>λ).(6.4)P(X^*(\tau)>\beta\lambda,\ \tau^{1/2}\le\delta\lambda)\le\frac{\delta^2}{(\beta-1)^2}P(X^*(\tau)>\lambda). \tag{6.4}P(X∗(τ)>βλ, τ1/2≤δλ)≤(β−1)2δ2​P(X∗(τ)>λ).(6.4)
  1. Lemma 7.1. If nonnegative f,gf,gf,g satisfy P(g>βλ,f≤δλ)≤εP(g>λ)P(g>\beta\lambda,f\le\delta\lambda)\le\varepsilon P(g>\lambda)P(g>βλ,f≤δλ)≤εP(g>λ) for all λ>0\lambda>0λ>0, and Φ(βλ)≤γΦ(λ)\Phi(\beta\lambda)\le\gamma\Phi(\lambda)Φ(βλ)≤γΦ(λ), Φ(δ−1λ)≤ηΦ(λ)\Phi(\delta^{-1}\lambda)\le\eta\Phi(\lambda)Φ(δ−1λ)≤ηΦ(λ) with γε<1\gamma\varepsilon<1γε<1, then
EΦ(g)≤γη1−γεEΦ(f).E\Phi(g)\le\frac{\gamma\eta}{1-\gamma\varepsilon}E\Phi(f).EΦ(g)≤1−γεγη​EΦ(f).

Significance

Theorem 6.1 is the Brownian case of the Burkholder–Davis–Gundy inequalities: for Brownian motion the stopping time τ\tauτ plays the role of the square function, since τ\tauτ is the quadratic variation of XXX up to time τ\tauτ. The result controls the stopped maximum through elapsed quadratic variation without a finite-time or integrability assumption. Lemma 7.1 is reusable: the paper applies it again in §§10–21 to discrete-time martingales.

The results are classical and proved; the mission's Lean statements remain open. Mathlib has Brownian motion as a predicate on processes (IsBrownianReal), while this development still needs optional sampling at the paper's stopping times and maximal inequalities for Brownian motion. A formal proof of this mission would provide Wald's identity at bounded optional times, a general good-λ\lambdaλ lemma, and the Brownian inequality with explicit dependence of the constants on c(6.1)c_{(6.1)}c(6.1)​.

Difficulty

The obvious route, integrating the tail bounds (6.3)–(6.4) against dΦd\PhidΦ, does not close by itself: the right-hand side of each good-λ\lambdaλ inequality contains the same random variable as the left-hand side, and nothing in the hypotheses says that EΦ(τ1/2)E\Phi(\tau^{1/2})EΦ(τ1/2) or EΦ(X∗(τ))E\Phi(X^*(\tau))EΦ(X∗(τ)) is finite, nor that τ\tauτ is finite. The theorem has to hold in that generality, with constants that see only c(6.1)c_{(6.1)}c(6.1)​ and not Φ\PhiΦ itself. On the probabilistic side, the stopping times of the paper are defined by the strict events {τ<t}\{\tau<t\}{τ<t} relative to the raw natural filtration B(t)\mathcal B(t)B(t), which is not right-continuous, while the one probabilistic input, Wald's identity (8.1), is a statement about optional sampling of the martingale X2(t)−tX^2(t)-tX2(t)−t in continuous time, for which Mathlib has no theorem yet.

Formalization scope

  • Probability spaces are (Ω : Type) [MeasurableSpace Ω] (P : Measure Ω) [IsProbabilityMeasure P]; time is ℝ≥0 and stopping times are valued in ℝ≥0∞.
  • Brownian motion IsBM X P is Mathlib's IsBrownianReal X P plus two explicit conjuncts the paper assumes: every sample function is continuous, and each X(t)X(t)X(t) is measurable (so B(t)⊆A\mathcal B(t)\subseteq\mathcal AB(t)⊆A). X(0)=0X(0)=0X(0)=0 holds almost surely.
  • IsStoppingTimeOf X τ is exactly the paper's condition {τ<t}∈B(t)\{\tau<t\}\in\mathcal B(t){τ<t}∈B(t), t>0t>0t>0, with B(t)\mathcal B(t)B(t) the raw generated σ\sigmaσ-field; it is weaker than Mathlib's IsStoppingTime, so the theorems are stronger than their Mathlib-stopping-time versions.
  • τ1/2\tau^{1/2}τ1/2, X∗(τ)X^*(\tau)X∗(τ), Φ\PhiΦ and all expectations take values in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞] (ℝ≥0∞, lintegral), with ∞1/2=∞\infty^{1/2}=\infty∞1/2=∞; both sides of (6.2) may be infinite. (8.1) is stated with lintegral on both sides.
  • The growth condition is required for all λ∈[0,∞]\lambda\in[0,\infty]λ∈[0,∞], equivalent to (6.1) by continuity. Φ≢0\Phi\not\equiv0Φ≡0, which the paper assumes "to eliminate the trivial case", is dropped: all conclusions hold trivially for Φ≡0\Phi\equiv0Φ≡0.
  • "The choice of ccc and CCC depends only on c(6.1)c_{(6.1)}c(6.1)​" is formalized with the quantifier order ∀ c, ∃ C₁ C₂ > 0, ∀ Ω P X τ Φ, IsPhi Φ c → …. A version in which the constants are chosen after Φ\PhiΦ, XXX or τ\tauτ would be trivial whenever the right-hand side is positive and is ruled out by this order.
  • In Lemma 7.1, f,gf,gf,g may take the value ∞\infty∞ and γ,η\gamma,\etaγ,η are nonnegative; both choices are harmless (see the item notes).

Contributions welcome: Wald's identity and optional sampling for Brownian motion at optional times, the Lebesgue–Stieltjes layer-cake formula EΦ(h)=∫0∞P(h>λ) dΦ(λ)E\Phi(h)=\int_0^\infty P(h>\lambda)\,d\Phi(\lambda)EΦ(h)=∫0∞​P(h>λ)dΦ(λ) for continuous non-decreasing Φ\PhiΦ (reusable for every Φ\PhiΦ inequality of the series), and the good-λ\lambdaλ lemma, which the later missions of this series share.

Selected references

  • D. L. Burkholder, Distribution function inequalities for martingales, Ann. Probability 1 (1973), 19–42. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176997023
  • D. L. Burkholder, B. J. Davis, R. F. Gundy, Integral inequalities for convex functions of operators on martingales, Proc. Sixth Berkeley Symp. Math. Statist. Probab. 2 (1972), 223–240. https://digicoll.lib.berkeley.edu/record/113227
  • D. L. Burkholder, R. F. Gundy, Extrapolation and interpolation of quasi-linear operators on martingales, Acta Math. 124 (1970), 249–304. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02394576
  • B. Davis, On the integrability of the martingale square function, Israel J. Math. 8 (1970), 187–190. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02771562
  • D. L. Burkholder, Martingale transforms, Ann. Math. Statist. 37 (1966), 1494–1504. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177699141
7 thms2 active usersReviewed
CombinatoricsProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Concentration of Measure and Isoperimetric Inequalities in Product Spaces V: The Convex Hull Distance — ∫ exp f_α(A,x) dP ≤ P(A)^{−α}Textbook

Motivation

A product probability space (ΩN,P)(\Omega^N, P)(ΩN,P), P=μ⊗NP=\mu^{\otimes N}P=μ⊗N, concentrates its mass: a set AAA of non-negligible measure is "close" to most points. How closeness is measured decides what the statement can be used for. The Hamming distance (Chapter 2 of the paper) counts coordinates in which a point differs from AAA; it gives Gaussian concentration, but only for functions that are Lipschitz for one fixed weighting of the coordinates. Chapter 4 of M. Talagrand, Concentration of measure and isoperimetric inequalities in product spaces (Publ. Math. IHÉS 81, 1995), introduces the convex hull distance, which controls every weighted Hamming distance at once with weights chosen after seeing the point. This one inequality is what the second half of the paper uses for the longest increasing subsequence, bin packing, suprema of linear forms, the chromatic number of random graphs, the random assignment problem and the travelling salesman problem, and it is the form in which "Talagrand's inequality" is usually quoted in probability and combinatorics.

History (paper, p. 125). The author first proved the deviation inequality of Theorem 13.2 of the paper for symmetric ±1\pm1±1 variables; W. B. Johnson and G. Schechtman extended it, and their one-dimensional lemma (Lemma 4.1.3 here) led to the abstract setting of Theorem 4.1.1. Section 4.2 sharpens the exponent 1/41/41/4 by replacing fc2/4f_c^2/4fc2​/4 with an exactly optimised penalty fαf_\alphafα​.

Setting

Let (Ω,μ)(\Omega,\mu)(Ω,μ) be a probability space, N≥0N\ge0N≥0 an integer and P=μ⊗NP=\mu^{\otimes N}P=μ⊗N on ΩN\Omega^NΩN. For A⊆ΩNA\subseteq\Omega^NA⊆ΩN and x∈ΩNx\in\Omega^Nx∈ΩN let

UA(x)={(si)i≤N∈{0,1}N; ∃y∈A, si=0⇒xi=yi},U_A(x)=\{(s_i)_{i\le N}\in\{0,1\}^N;\ \exists y\in A,\ s_i=0\Rightarrow x_i=y_i\},UA​(x)={(si​)i≤N​∈{0,1}N; ∃y∈A, si​=0⇒xi​=yi​},

the set of 000–111 vectors marking a superset of the coordinates in which xxx differs from some point of AAA. Let VA(x)V_A(x)VA​(x) be its convex hull in RN\mathbb R^NRN; it contains 000 exactly when x∈Ax\in Ax∈A. The convex hull distance fc(A,x)f_c(A,x)fc​(A,x) is the Euclidean distance from 000 to VA(x)V_A(x)VA​(x), and the enlargement of AAA is

Atc={x∈ΩN; fc(A,x)≤t}A_t^c=\{x\in\Omega^N;\ f_c(A,x)\le t\}Atc​={x∈ΩN; fc​(A,x)≤t}

(the superscript ccc stands for "convexity", not for a complement). For α≥0\alpha\ge0α≥0 and u∈[0,1]u\in[0,1]u∈[0,1] put

ξ(α,u)=α(1−u)log⁡(1−u)−(α+1−αu)log⁡(1+α−αu1+α),\xi(\alpha,u)=\alpha(1-u)\log(1-u)-(\alpha+1-\alpha u)\log\Big(\frac{1+\alpha-\alpha u}{1+\alpha}\Big),ξ(α,u)=α(1−u)log(1−u)−(α+1−αu)log(1+α1+α−αu​),

and let fα(A,x)=inf⁡{∑i≤Nξ(α,si); s∈VA(x)}f_\alpha(A,x)=\inf\{\sum_{i\le N}\xi(\alpha,s_i);\ s\in V_A(x)\}fα​(A,x)=inf{∑i≤N​ξ(α,si​); s∈VA​(x)}; it plays the role of fc2(A,x)f_c^2(A,x)fc2​(A,x).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.2.4

For α>0\alpha>0α>0 and every A⊆ΩNA\subseteq\Omega^NA⊆ΩN,

∫exp⁡fα(A,x) dP(x)≤1P(A)α.\int\exp f_\alpha(A,x)\,dP(x)\le\frac{1}{P(A)^{\alpha}}.∫expfα​(A,x)dP(x)≤P(A)α1​.

The constant is exact (no unspecified constants), and the statement holds for every probability space Ω\OmegaΩ and every NNN.

Milestones

  • Lemma 4.1.2: x∈Atcx\in A_t^cx∈Atc​ iff for every real (αi)(\alpha_i)(αi​) some y∈Ay\in Ay∈A has ∑{αi; xi≠yi}≤t(∑αi2)1/2\sum\{\alpha_i;\ x_i\ne y_i\}\le t(\sum\alpha_i^2)^{1/2}∑{αi​; xi​=yi​}≤t(∑αi2​)1/2.
  • Lemma 4.1.3: inf⁡0≤λ≤1r−λexp⁡(1−λ)24≤2−r\inf_{0\le\lambda\le1}r^{-\lambda}\exp\frac{(1-\lambda)^2}{4}\le2-rinf0≤λ≤1​r−λexp4(1−λ)2​≤2−r for 0≤r≤10\le r\le10≤r≤1.
  • Lemma 4.2.1: inf⁡0≤λ≤1r−λαexp⁡ξ(α,1−λ)=1+α−αr\inf_{0\le\lambda\le1}r^{-\lambda\alpha}\exp\xi(\alpha,1-\lambda)=1+\alpha-\alpha rinf0≤λ≤1​r−λαexpξ(α,1−λ)=1+α−αr for 0<r<10<r<10<r<1.
  • Lemma 4.2.2: ξ(α,⋅)\xi(\alpha,\cdot)ξ(α,⋅) is increasing and convex on [0,1][0,1][0,1] and ξ(α,u)≥α2(α+1)u2\xi(\alpha,u)\ge\frac{\alpha}{2(\alpha+1)}u^2ξ(α,u)≥2(α+1)α​u2.
  • Lemma 4.2.3: 1+α−αa≤a−α1+\alpha-\alpha a\le a^{-\alpha}1+α−αa≤a−α and a+(1−a)exp⁡ξ(α,1)≤a−αa+(1-a)\exp\xi(\alpha,1)\le a^{-\alpha}a+(1−a)expξ(α,1)≤a−α.
  • Eq. (4.2.6): P(Atc)≥1−P(A)−αexp⁡(−αt22(α+1))P(A_t^c)\ge1-P(A)^{-\alpha}\exp\big(-\frac{\alpha t^2}{2(\alpha+1)}\big)P(Atc​)≥1−P(A)−αexp(−2(α+1)αt2​).
  • Corollary 4.2.5: for t≥2log⁡(1/P(A))t\ge\sqrt{2\log(1/P(A))}t≥2log(1/P(A))​, P(Atc)≥1−exp⁡(−12(t−2log⁡(1/P(A)))2)P(A_t^c)\ge1-\exp\big(-\frac12(t-\sqrt{2\log(1/P(A))})^2\big)P(Atc​)≥1−exp(−21​(t−2log(1/P(A))​)2).
  • Theorem 4.3.1 (two-point space, uniform μ\muμ, α≥1\alpha\ge1α≥1): ∫exp⁡(αα+1fc2(A,x)) dP(x)≤P(A)−α\int\exp\big(\frac{\alpha}{\alpha+1}f_c^2(A,x)\big)\,dP(x)\le P(A)^{-\alpha}∫exp(α+1α​fc2​(A,x))dP(x)≤P(A)−α.

Significance

The result. At α=1\alpha=1α=1, Lemma 4.2.2 gives ξ(1,u)≥u2/4\xi(1,u)\ge u^2/4ξ(1,u)≥u2/4, so the goal contains Theorem 4.1.1,

∫exp⁡14fc2(A,x) dP(x)≤1P(A),P(Atc)≥1−1P(A)e−t2/4,\int\exp\tfrac14f_c^2(A,x)\,dP(x)\le\frac1{P(A)},\qquad P(A_t^c)\ge1-\frac1{P(A)}e^{-t^2/4},∫exp41​fc2​(A,x)dP(x)≤P(A)1​,P(Atc​)≥1−P(A)1​e−t2/4,

the convex distance inequality itself. For general α\alphaα it improves the coefficient of t2t^2t2 from 1/41/41/4 to the optimal 1/21/21/2 (Corollary 4.2.5), and since ξ(α,1)=log⁡(1+α)\xi(\alpha,1)=\log(1+\alpha)ξ(α,1)=log(1+α) grows with α\alphaα, it simultaneously controls the number of coordinates in which xxx must be changed to reach AAA, recovering features of the qqq-point inequalities of Chapter 3. Every Part II application of the paper rests on Theorem 4.1.1 or on this sharpening.

Formalizing it. All results here are proved in the paper (the goal's proof is "an obvious adaptation" of that of Theorem 4.1.1, by induction on NNN). None of them has a machine-checked proof for a general probability space. Theorem 4.1.1 itself is posed on the platform, still open, for finite alphabets and finite sets (Talagrand.Eexp_mul_mass_le_one, Talagrand.mass_mul_mass_le_exp); it is not posed again here. A proof of the goal settles it for arbitrary Ω\OmegaΩ and arbitrary measurable AAA.

Difficulty

The function x↦fα(A,x)x\mapsto f_\alpha(A,x)x↦fα​(A,x) is not a sum of one-coordinate terms, so no tensorization of a one-dimensional inequality applies directly. Bounding fα(A,x)f_\alpha(A,x)fα​(A,x) pointwise by the distance to a single nearby point of AAA gives only Hamming-type bounds with a fixed weighting, which is exactly what the convex hull distance is designed to beat; the inequality has to hold for the infimum over the whole hull. The one-coordinate estimate the paper uses is the exact identity of Lemma 4.2.1, which leaves no slack. A further obstacle is analytic: VA(x)V_A(x)VA​(x) is a convex hull in RN\mathbb R^NRN of a set indexed by the possibly uncountable set AAA, and its infima must be compared across dimensions NNN and N+1N+1N+1.

Formalization scope

  • ΩN\Omega^NΩN is Fin N → Ω; PPP is Measure.pi (fun _ : Fin N => μ) with IsProbabilityMeasure μ.
  • UA(x)U_A(x)UA​(x) is a set of Fin N → ℝ with values in {0,1}\{0,1\}{0,1}; VA(x)V_A(x)VA​(x) is convexHull ℝ (U A x). The ℓ2\ell^2ℓ2 norm is written out as ∑isi2\sqrt{\sum_i s_i^2}∑i​si2​​: Mathlib's norm on Fin N → ℝ is the sup norm.
  • fcf_cfc​ and fαf_\alphafα​ take values in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞] (ℝ≥0∞); both are +∞+\infty+∞ when A=∅A=\varnothingA=∅. exp⁡(+∞)=+∞\exp(+\infty)=+\inftyexp(+∞)=+∞ (EReal.exp), P(A)−α=+∞P(A)^{-\alpha}=+\inftyP(A)−α=+∞ when P(A)=0P(A)=0P(A)=0. No real-valued infimum or Bochner integral is used, so no junk value can make a bound hold for free.
  • ξ(α,1)=log⁡(1+α)\xi(\alpha,1)=\log(1+\alpha)ξ(α,1)=log(1+α) relies on 0⋅log⁡0=00\cdot\log0=00⋅log0=0, which Mathlib's Real.log 0 = 0 provides.
  • Measurability. The paper ignores measurability (pp. 81–82). Here AAA and x↦fα(A,x)x\mapsto f_\alpha(A,x)x↦fα​(A,x) are assumed measurable (explicit hypotheses), integrals are ∫⁻, and P(Atc)P(A_t^c)P(Atc​) is the measure of an arbitrary set, i.e. its outer probability, as the paper prescribes.
  • α>0\alpha>0α>0 in the goal; t≥0t\ge0t≥0 for the enlargement; P(A)>0P(A)>0P(A)>0 in Corollary 4.2.5, where the paper's hypothesis on ttt is otherwise unsatisfiable. In §4.3, Ω={0,1}\Omega=\{0,1\}Ω={0,1} is Bool with PMF.uniformOfFintype.
  • A trivializing formalization is ruled out: restricting Ω\OmegaΩ to a finite type or AAA to a finite set would give a strictly weaker statement (and the finite case of Theorem 4.1.1 is already posed elsewhere).
  • Needed infrastructure: convex hulls of 000–111 vectors and their behaviour under adding a coordinate, Hölder's inequality for ∫⁻, Fubini for Measure.pi on Fin (N+1), and the one-variable calculus of ξ\xiξ. The definitions module is the substrate the Part II chapters of the paper use; proofs of the one-variable lemmas and of the induction step are welcome independently.
  • Corollary 4.3.2 is not included: the paper derives it from Theorem 4.3.1 by optimising over α≥1\alpha\ge1α≥1, which only covers t≥2log⁡(1/P(A))t\ge2\sqrt{\log(1/P(A))}t≥2log(1/P(A))​, and the printed range t≥log⁡(1/P(A))t\ge\sqrt{\log(1/P(A))}t≥log(1/P(A))​ is not established on the page.

Selected references

  • M. Talagrand, Concentration of measure and isoperimetric inequalities in product spaces, Publ. Math. IHÉS 81 (1995), 73–205. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02699376
10 thms2 active usersReviewed
Harmonic AnalysisProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Distribution Function Inequalities for Martingales 1: The Square Function and the Martingale Have Equivalent L^p Norms for 1 < p < ∞Research Paper

Why the square function of a martingale matters

A martingale f=(f1,f2,… )f = (f_1, f_2, \dots)f=(f1​,f2​,…) is a sum fn=d1+⋯+dnf_n = d_1 + \cdots + d_nfn​=d1​+⋯+dn​ of increments that are uncorrelated with the past. For sums of independent random variables, sizes are compared through the sum of squares of the summands; for martingales the corresponding object is the square function

S(f)=(∑k=1∞dk2)1/2.S(f) = \Bigl(\sum_{k=1}^\infty d_k^2\Bigr)^{1/2}.S(f)=(k=1∑∞​dk2​)1/2.

Comparing the size of fff with the size of S(f)S(f)S(f) is one of the basic tools of probability and of harmonic analysis: it underlies Khintchine-type inequalities, the LpL^pLp theory of martingale transforms, the Littlewood–Paley theory of dyadic and Fourier series, and the Burkholder–Davis–Gundy inequalities used throughout stochastic calculus.

Timeline. Paley (1932) proved LpL^pLp bounds for the square function of Walsh–Paley series, the dyadic model case. Marcinkiewicz and Zygmund (1937–38) proved the analogous inequalities for sums of independent mean-zero random variables. Burkholder (1966, Ann. Math. Statist. 37) proved them for general martingales, 1<p<∞1 < p < \infty1<p<∞, together with the weak-type (1,1)(1,1)(1,1) bound for S(f)S(f)S(f). Burkholder and Gundy (1970) extended the comparison to functions Φ\PhiΦ of moderate growth by distribution function ("good-λ\lambdaλ") inequalities, and Davis (1970) settled p=1p = 1p=1 for f∗=sup⁡n∣fn∣f^* = \sup_n |f_n|f∗=supn​∣fn​∣. The 1973 Wald lectures formalized here re-derive the 1<p<∞1 < p < \infty1<p<∞ inequality from one elementary stopping-time identity (Lemma 2.1), with explicit constants.

Setting

Let (Ω,A,P)(\Omega, \mathcal A, P)(Ω,A,P) be a probability space and A0⊆A1⊆⋯\mathcal A_0 \subseteq \mathcal A_1 \subseteq \cdotsA0​⊆A1​⊆⋯ sub-σ\sigmaσ-fields of A\mathcal AA. A martingale relative to A1,A2,…\mathcal A_1, \mathcal A_2, \dotsA1​,A2​,… is a sequence of integrable random variables fnf_nfn​, with fnf_nfn​ An\mathcal A_nAn​-measurable and E(fn+1∣An)=fnE(f_{n+1} \mid \mathcal A_n) = f_nE(fn+1​∣An​)=fn​; a submartingale has ≥\ge≥ in place of ===.

With the convention f0=0f_0 = 0f0​=0, the difference sequence is dk=fk−fk−1d_k = f_k - f_{k-1}dk​=fk​−fk−1​ (so d1=f1d_1 = f_1d1​=f1​). Write

  • Sn(f)=(∑k=1ndk2)1/2S_n(f) = (\sum_{k=1}^n d_k^2)^{1/2}Sn​(f)=(∑k=1n​dk2​)1/2 and S(f)=sup⁡nSn(f)∈[0,∞]S(f) = \sup_n S_n(f) \in [0, \infty]S(f)=supn​Sn​(f)∈[0,∞];
  • fn∗=max⁡1≤k≤n∣fk∣f_n^* = \max_{1\le k\le n} |f_k|fn∗​=max1≤k≤n​∣fk​∣ and f∗=sup⁡n∣fn∣f^* = \sup_n |f_n|f∗=supn​∣fn​∣;
  • ∥Y∥p=(E∣Y∣p)1/p\|Y\|_p = (E|Y|^p)^{1/p}∥Y∥p​=(E∣Y∣p)1/p for a random variable YYY, and ∥f∥p=sup⁡n≥1∥fn∥p\|f\|_p = \sup_{n\ge1} \|f_n\|_p∥f∥p​=supn≥1​∥fn​∥p​ for the process. The process is LpL^pLp-bounded when ∥f∥p<∞\|f\|_p < \infty∥f∥p​<∞.

For λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0 the exit time μ=inf⁡{n≥1:∣fn∣>λ}\mu = \inf\{n \ge 1 : |f_n| > \lambda\}μ=inf{n≥1:∣fn​∣>λ} (with inf⁡∅=∞\inf\emptyset = \inftyinf∅=∞) is a stopping time; fμf_\mufμ​, fμ−1f_{\mu-1}fμ−1​, Sμ−1(f)S_{\mu-1}(f)Sμ−1​(f) denote evaluation at the random index, with f∞=lim⁡nfnf_\infty = \lim_n f_nf∞​=limn​fn​ and S∞(f)=S(f)S_\infty(f) = S(f)S∞​(f)=S(f).

In Lean these are dseq, sqFnN, sqFn, maxFnN, lpNormE, pNorm, exitTime, valAt and sqFnAt in the namespace BurkholderDFI.SquareFnLp.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.2

For each 1<p<∞1 < p < \infty1<p<∞ there are positive constants cp,Cpc_p, C_pcp​,Cp​, depending only on ppp, such that every martingale satisfies

cp∥S(f)∥p≤∥f∥p≤Cp∥S(f)∥p.c_p \|S(f)\|_p \le \|f\|_p \le C_p \|S(f)\|_p .cp​∥S(f)∥p​≤∥f∥p​≤Cp​∥S(f)∥p​.

The goal asserts only existence of the constants, so that it does not depend on the particular numbers the paper's proof produces.

Milestones

In attack order:

  1. Doob's maximal inequality (1.1): λP(fn∗>λ)≤∫{fn∗>λ}∣fn∣≤∥f∥1\lambda P(f_n^* > \lambda) \le \int_{\{f_n^*>\lambda\}} |f_n| \le \|f\|_1λP(fn∗​>λ)≤∫{fn∗​>λ}​∣fn​∣≤∥f∥1​.
  2. Doob's facts (§1): an L1L^1L1-bounded martingale or nonnegative submartingale converges a.e., and ∥fμ∥1≤∥f∥1\|f_\mu\|_1 \le \|f\|_1∥fμ​∥1​≤∥f∥1​ for every stopping time μ\muμ.
  3. The classical extrapolation (1.2)–(1.3): λP(Y>βλ)≤α∫{Y>λ}X\lambda P(Y > \beta\lambda) \le \alpha\int_{\{Y>\lambda\}} XλP(Y>βλ)≤α∫{Y>λ}​X for all λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0 implies ∥Y∥p≤αβpq∥X∥p\|Y\|_p \le \alpha\beta^p q \|X\|_p∥Y∥p​≤αβpq∥X∥p​.
  4. Lemma 2.1: ∥Sμ−1(f)∥22+∥fμ−1∥22≤2Efμfμ−1≤2λ∥f∥1\|S_{\mu-1}(f)\|_2^2 + \|f_{\mu-1}\|_2^2 \le 2E f_\mu f_{\mu-1} \le 2\lambda\|f\|_1∥Sμ−1​(f)∥22​+∥fμ−1​∥22​≤2Efμ​fμ−1​≤2λ∥f∥1​, with equality on the left for martingales.
  5. Theorem 3.1: λP(S(f)>λ)≤3∥f∥1\lambda P(S(f) > \lambda) \le 3\|f\|_1λP(S(f)>λ)≤3∥f∥1​.
  6. Lemma 3.1, (3.4) and (3.5): for nonnegative submartingales, ∥Sn(f)∥p≤9p1/2q∥fn∥p\|S_n(f)\|_p \le 9p^{1/2}q\|f_n\|_p∥Sn​(f)∥p​≤9p1/2q∥fn​∥p​.
  7. (3.7): for martingales, ∥Sn(f)∥p≤18p1/2q∥fn∥p\|S_n(f)\|_p \le 18 p^{1/2} q \|f_n\|_p∥Sn​(f)∥p​≤18p1/2q∥fn​∥p​.
  8. The duality bound: ∥fn∥p≤18q1/2p∥Sn(f)∥p\|f_n\|_p \le 18 q^{1/2} p \|S_n(f)\|_p∥fn​∥p​≤18q1/2p∥Sn​(f)∥p​.

Here qqq is the conjugate exponent, p−1+q−1=1p^{-1} + q^{-1} = 1p−1+q−1=1.

Significance

The result. Theorem 3.2 says that a martingale is bounded in LpL^pLp exactly when its square function lies in LpL^pLp, with comparable norms. It reduces questions about fff, whose increments interact, to questions about ∑dk2\sum d_k^2∑dk2​, a sum of nonnegative terms. Immediate consequences include the LpL^pLp boundedness of martingale transforms ∑vkdk\sum v_k d_k∑vk​dk​ with ∣vk∣≤1|v_k| \le 1∣vk​∣≤1 (unconditionality of martingale differences in LpL^pLp), Marcinkiewicz–Zygmund and Khintchine inequalities, and, by passing through dyadic martingales, Littlewood–Paley inequalities. Theorem 3.1 is the endpoint estimate: at p=1p = 1p=1 the strong inequality fails, and weak type (1,1)(1,1)(1,1) is what survives.

The formalization. The theorem is classical and proved; the remaining work is to machine-check it. Mathlib at the pinned revision contains no square function inequality for martingales (no occurrence of Burkholder's inequality or of a martingale square function in Mathlib/Probability); it has Doob's maximal inequality for nonnegative submartingales, optional stopping, and a.e. convergence of L1L^1L1-bounded submartingales. The mission would add the stopping-time identity of Lemma 2.1, the weak-type bound with constant 3, the explicit LpL^pLp constants 18p1/2q18 p^{1/2} q18p1/2q and 18q1/2p18 q^{1/2} p18q1/2p, and the general extrapolation lemma (1.3), each reusable on its own.

Difficulty

The obvious route, expanding ESn(f)2=Efn2E S_n(f)^2 = E f_n^2ESn​(f)2=Efn2​ by orthogonality, works only at p=2p = 2p=2. For p≠2p \ne 2p=2 no such identity exists, and interpolation from p=2p = 2p=2 needs an endpoint estimate that is itself the hard part: S(f)S(f)S(f) is not bounded on L1L^1L1. The paper obtains the endpoint from Lemma 2.1, whose content is an exact computation at the random time μ\muμ; turning it into rigorous Lean requires handling evaluation at μ=∞\mu = \inftyμ=∞ (where the a.e. limit f∞f_\inftyf∞​ enters), passage to the limit n→∞n \to \inftyn→∞ in stopped identities with only L1L^1L1 control, and integrability of the products fμfμ−1f_\mu f_{\mu-1}fμ​fμ−1​. The upper bound is not a formal consequence of the lower one at the same exponent: it requires passing to the conjugate exponent qqq.

Formalization scope

  • Processes are f : ℕ → Ω → ℝ; martingales and submartingales are Mathlib's Martingale f ℱ P / Submartingale f ℱ P for a filtration ℱ : Filtration ℕ _ with ℱ k =Ak= \mathcal A_k=Ak​. The paper's f0=0f_0 = 0f0​=0 is built into every definition, which never reads Lean's f 0. Mathlib additionally relates f 0 to f1f_1f1​; this is no restriction, since any martingale relative to A1,A2,…\mathcal A_1, \mathcal A_2, \dotsA1​,A2​,… extends by f0:=E(f1∣A0)f_0 := E(f_1 \mid \mathcal A_0)f0​:=E(f1​∣A0​).
  • "Nonnegative submartingale" means fn≥0f_n \ge 0fn​≥0 almost everywhere for n≥1n \ge 1n≥1.
  • S(f)S(f)S(f), f∗f^*f∗, ∥⋅∥p\|\cdot\|_p∥⋅∥p​ and ∥f∥p\|f\|_p∥f∥p​ take values in [0,∞][0, \infty][0,∞]. Neither ∥f∥p\|f\|_p∥f∥p​ nor ∥S(f)∥p\|S(f)\|_p∥S(f)∥p​ is assumed finite in Theorem 3.2, which therefore also asserts that one is infinite exactly when the other is. In Theorem 3.1, ∥f∥1=∞\|f\|_1 = \infty∥f∥1​=∞ makes the bound trivial, matching the paper's "we may assume that fff is L1L^1L1-bounded".
  • The constants of Theorem 3.2 are quantified before the probability space, the filtration and the martingale. A formalization in which cp,Cpc_p, C_pcp​,Cp​ may depend on fff (for instance Cp=∥f∥p/∥S(f)∥pC_p = \|f\|_p / \|S(f)\|_pCp​=∥f∥p​/∥S(f)∥p​) would be trivially true and is excluded by this quantifier order; so is assuming finiteness of either side.
  • The a.e. limit f∞f_\inftyf∞​ is a parameter of Lemma 2.1 together with the hypothesis that fn→f∞f_n \to f_\inftyfn​→f∞​ a.e.; Doob's §1 facts assert that such a limit exists.
  • Probability spaces live in Type (universe 0).
  • The asymptotic remark after Theorem 3.2 (cp−1=O(p1/2q)c_p^{-1} = O(p^{1/2}q)cp−1​=O(p1/2q), Cp=O(q1/2p)C_p = O(q^{1/2}p)Cp​=O(q1/2p)) is not formalized; the explicit constants it summarizes are milestones 7 and 8.

Infrastructure that a complete development needs and that is reusable beyond this mission: evaluation of a process at an N∪{∞}\mathbb N \cup \{\infty\}N∪{∞}-valued stopping time, the layer-cake formula ∥Y∥pp=∫0∞pλp−1P(Y>λ) dλ\|Y\|_p^p = \int_0^\infty p\lambda^{p-1} P(Y > \lambda)\, d\lambda∥Y∥pp​=∫0∞​pλp−1P(Y>λ)dλ for [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]-valued YYY, and conditional-expectation martingales E(g∣Ak)E(g \mid \mathcal A_k)E(g∣Ak​) with their difference sequences. Proofs of any milestone, in any order, are welcome.

Selected references

  • D. L. Burkholder, Distribution function inequalities for martingales, Ann. Probability 1 (1973), 19–42. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176997023
  • D. L. Burkholder, Martingale transforms, Ann. Math. Statist. 37 (1966), 1494–1504. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177699141
  • D. L. Burkholder and R. F. Gundy, Extrapolation and interpolation of quasi-linear operators on martingales, Acta Math. 124 (1970), 249–304. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02394573
  • B. Davis, On the integrability of the martingale square function, Israel J. Math. 8 (1970), 187–190. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02771313
  • J. L. Doob, Stochastic Processes, Wiley, New York, 1953.
  • R. E. A. C. Paley, A remarkable series of orthogonal functions (I), Proc. London Math. Soc. (2) 34 (1932), 241–264. https://doi.org/10.1112/plms/s2-34.1.241
11 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Regret in Decision Making under Uncertainty 1: Under Assumptions 2 and 3, Utility over Final and Foregone Assets Takes the Regret Form u(x, y) = αv(x) + f(v(x) − v(y))Research Paper

Why regret enters the utility function

Expected utility theory predicts that a decision maker's choice between two lotteries depends only on the distribution of final wealth under each. Observed behaviour contradicts this in systematic ways: the Allais paradox, the coexistence of insurance and gambling, and the reflection effect documented by Kahneman and Tversky (1979). David Bell's 1982 paper (Operations Research 30(5), 961–981) explains these patterns by regret: the dissatisfaction of learning that the alternative not chosen would have done better. In the same year Loomes and Sugden (1982) proposed a closely related theory; together the two papers are the origin of regret theory in decision analysis.

Bell's contribution is axiomatic. Instead of postulating a regret term, he derives the shape of a utility function that incorporates regret from three behavioural assumptions about how preferences respond to shifting all outcomes by an equal increment of value. This mission formalizes that derivation, Section 1 of the paper (pp. 965–970), culminating in Theorem 1.

Setting

An endpoint is described by two attributes: the final assets xxx and the foregone assets yyy, the asset level the decision maker would have had under the alternative not chosen. Utility is a function u(x,y)u(x,y)u(x,y), strictly increasing in xxx and strictly decreasing in yyy.

A simple comparison is a choice between two alternatives whose uncertainties are resolved by one predetermined joint distribution. With nnn states, a probability vector p=(p1,…,pn)p=(p_1,\dots,p_n)p=(p1​,…,pn​) and alternatives A,B∈RnA,B\in\mathbb R^nA,B∈Rn (AiA_iAi​ the final assets of AAA in state iii), the expected utility of selecting AAA while BBB is foregone is

EUp(A ∣ B)=∑i=1npi u(Ai,Bi),\mathrm{EU}_p(A\,|\,B)=\sum_{i=1}^n p_i\,u(A_i,B_i),EUp​(A∣B)=i=1∑n​pi​u(Ai​,Bi​),

and AAA is preferred to BBB when EUp(B ∣ A)<EUp(A ∣ B)\mathrm{EU}_p(B\,|\,A)<\mathrm{EU}_p(A\,|\,B)EUp​(B∣A)<EUp​(A∣B) (inequality (1) of the paper).

A value function v:R→Rv:\mathbb R\to\mathbb Rv:R→R, strictly increasing and onto R\mathbb RR, measures incremental value: moving from aaa to bbb is worth v(b)−v(a)v(b)-v(a)v(b)−v(a). An alternative A′A'A′ is obtained from AAA by a shift of incremental value δ\deltaδ if v(Ai′)=v(Ai)+δv(A'_i)=v(A_i)+\deltav(Ai′​)=v(Ai​)+δ for every state.

  • Assumption 1. Shifting every outcome of both alternatives by the same incremental value leaves the preferred alternative unchanged.
  • Assumption 2. If v(x2)−v(x1)=v(x3)−v(x2)v(x_2)-v(x_1)=v(x_3)-v(x_2)v(x2​)−v(x1​)=v(x3​)−v(x2​), the decision maker is indifferent between x2x_2x2​ for sure and a 50-50 lottery between x1x_1x1​ and x3x_3x3​.
  • Assumption 3. If selecting L1L_1L1​ over L2L_2L2​ is preferred to selecting L3L_3L3​ over L4L_4L4​, that is EUp(L3 ∣ L4)<EUp(L1 ∣ L2)\mathrm{EU}_p(L_3\,|\,L_4)<\mathrm{EU}_p(L_1\,|\,L_2)EUp​(L3​∣L4​)<EUp​(L1​∣L2​), this persists after all outcomes of all four alternatives are shifted by the same incremental value.

Formalization targets

Goal: the regret form (Theorem 1, p. 969, corrected)

Under Assumptions 2 and 3, there are a constant α\alphaα and a function fff with

u(x,y)=α v(x)+f(v(x)−v(y))for all x,y.u(x,y)=\alpha\,v(x)+f\big(v(x)-v(y)\big)\quad\text{for all }x,y.u(x,y)=αv(x)+f(v(x)−v(y))for all x,y.

Utility separates additively into a term in the value of final assets and a function of the regret v(x)−v(y)v(x)-v(y)v(x)−v(y). The coefficient α\alphaα is left free (see Formalization scope).

Milestones, in the order of the paper's argument

  1. Proof of Lemma 1 (p. 967): for v(x)=xv(x)=xv(x)=x, w(x+h,y+h)=k(h) w(x,y)w(x+h,y+h)=k(h)\,w(x,y)w(x+h,y+h)=k(h)w(x,y) with k(h)>0k(h)>0k(h)>0, where w(x,y)=u(x,y)−u(y,x)w(x,y)=u(x,y)-u(y,x)w(x,y)=u(x,y)−u(y,x).
  2. Lemma 1, linear vvv (p. 967): u(x,y)−u(y,x)=[u(0,y−x)−u(y−x,0)] e−cxu(x,y)-u(y,x)=[u(0,y-x)-u(y-x,0)]\,e^{-cx}u(x,y)−u(y,x)=[u(0,y−x)−u(y−x,0)]e−cx.
  3. Lemma 1 (p. 967): Assumption 1 implies u(x,y)−u(y,x)=g(v(x)−v(y)) e−c v(x)u(x,y)-u(y,x)=g(v(x)-v(y))\,e^{-c\,v(x)}u(x,y)−u(y,x)=g(v(x)−v(y))e−cv(x).
  4. Lemma 2, linear vvv (p. 968): u(x,y)−u(y,x)=u(0,y−x)−u(y−x,0)u(x,y)-u(y,x)=u(0,y-x)-u(y-x,0)u(x,y)−u(y,x)=u(0,y−x)−u(y−x,0).
  5. Lemma 2 (p. 968): Assumptions 1 and 2 imply u(x,y)−u(y,x)=g(v(x)−v(y))u(x,y)-u(y,x)=g(v(x)-v(y))u(x,y)−u(y,x)=g(v(x)−v(y)).
  6. Assumption 1 is a special case of Assumption 3 (p. 969).
  7. Proof of Theorem 1 (p. 970): for v(x)=xv(x)=xv(x)=x, u(x+h,y+h)−u(x,y)=j(h)u(x+h,y+h)-u(x,y)=j(h)u(x+h,y+h)−u(x,y)=j(h).
  8. Theorem 1 for v(x)=xv(x)=xv(x)=x (p. 970): u(x,y)=αx+u(0,y−x)u(x,y)=\alpha x+u(0,y-x)u(x,y)=αx+u(0,y−x).

Significance

The additive form is the basis of the rest of Bell's paper: Section 2 uses it to show that a single decision maker with fff decreasingly concave both buys fair insurance and takes long-odds bets, and to account for the Allais paradox and the reflection effect. The same additive structure, a value term plus a function of the regret difference, is the form in which regret theory has been used since, alongside the parallel proposal of Loomes and Sugden (1982). Lemmas 1 and 2 have independent content: simple comparisons identify only the antisymmetric part u(x,y)−u(y,x)u(x,y)-u(y,x)u(x,y)−u(y,x), and the lemmas pin that part down to a function of the regret difference.

The results are published with proofs in prose; none has a machine-checked proof. Formalizing them checks the argument as printed, which turns out to need a correction (the coefficient of v(x)v(x)v(x) in (4)), and fills in the regularity steps the paper leaves implicit: the solutions of the Cauchy equations that appear, and the passage from v(x)=xv(x)=xv(x)=x to a general value function.

Difficulty

The obvious argument reads each assumption as a functional equation and solves it. Two steps resist this. First, the functional equations k(x+h)=k(x)k(h)k(x+h)=k(x)k(h)k(x+h)=k(x)k(h) and j(x+h)=j(x)+j(h)j(x+h)=j(x)+j(h)j(x+h)=j(x)+j(h) have non-measurable solutions; excluding them needs boundedness of kkk and jjj on intervals, which must be extracted from the monotonicity of uuu and is never stated on the page. Second, the proof of Theorem 1 compares two 50-50 lotteries that are indifferent and requires g(a1−b1)g(a_1-b_1)g(a1​−b1​) to take an arbitrary value u(c1,c2)−u(a2,b2)u(c_1,c_2)-u(a_2,b_2)u(c1​,c2​)−u(a2​,b2​); when ggg is bounded no such indifference exists, so the printed step does not cover every case. Passing from v(x)=xv(x)=xv(x)=x to a general vvv requires transporting all three assumptions along v−1v^{-1}v−1.

Formalization scope

  • Assets, probabilities and utilities are real numbers; uuu is u : ℝ → ℝ → ℝ with u x y =u(x,y)=u(x,y)=u(x,y). Every theorem assumes uuu strictly increasing in xxx and strictly decreasing in yyy (the paper's "increasing"/"decreasing", p. 965, read strictly).
  • A simple comparison is a probability vector on Fin n and two alternatives on the same states. Assumption 3 quantifies over four alternatives on one common state space, the setting of the paper's own use of it.
  • The value function is strictly increasing (p. 968) and, as an added reading, maps R\mathbb RR onto R\mathbb RR: Assumptions 1 and 3 shift outcomes by arbitrary equal incremental values, which presupposes that every shifted value is attained. "vvv linear" (Lemmas 1, 2) is read as v(x)=ax+bv(x)=ax+bv(x)=ax+b with a>0a>0a>0.
  • Indifference in Assumption 2 is "neither alternative is preferred", equivalent to the first display on p. 969.
  • Corrected slip. The paper's display (4) and the end of its proof have coefficient 111 on v(x)v(x)v(x) (resp. xxx). This is false as printed: v(x)=xv(x)=xv(x)=x, u(x,y)=x−yu(x,y)=x-yu(x,y)=x−y satisfies every hypothesis, but x−y=x+f(x−y)x-y=x+f(x-y)x−y=x+f(x−y) forces f(0)=0f(0)=0f(0)=0 at x=y=0x=y=0x=y=0 and f(0)=−1f(0)=-1f(0)=−1 at x=y=1x=y=1x=y=1. The proof derives j(h)=αhj(h)=\alpha hj(h)=αh and silently sets α=1\alpha=1α=1. The goal and milestone 8 keep α\alphaα free, with no sign or normalisation imposed; milestone texts stay verbatim.
  • All existential objects (kkk, ccc, ggg, jjj, α\alphaα, fff) are chosen before the variables x,y,hx,y,hx,y,h. The assumptions are statements about preferences between lotteries, never functional equations on uuu; a formalization that states an assumption as "u(x+h,y+h)−u(x,y)u(x+h,y+h)-u(x,y)u(x+h,y+h)−u(x,y) is independent of (x,y)(x,y)(x,y)" would put the conclusion into the hypothesis and is ruled out.
  • Needed infrastructure: monotone or locally bounded solutions of the Cauchy additive and multiplicative equations on R\mathbb RR, and transport of the assumptions along an order isomorphism of R\mathbb RR. Both are reusable; contributions proving either are welcome.

Selected references

  • D. E. Bell, Regret in Decision Making under Uncertainty, Operations Research 30(5), 961–981, 1982. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.30.5.961
  • G. Loomes and R. Sugden, Regret Theory: An Alternative Theory of Rational Choice under Uncertainty, The Economic Journal 92(368), 805–824, 1982. https://doi.org/10.2307/2232669
  • D. Kahneman and A. Tversky, Prospect Theory: An Analysis of Decision under Risk, Econometrica 47(2), 263–291, 1979. https://doi.org/10.2307/1914185
10 thms2 active usersReviewed
Convex OptimizationOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

The Łojasiewicz Inequality for Nonsmooth Subanalytic Functions with Applications to Subgradient Dynamical Systems II: The Łojasiewicz Inequality for Convex Subanalytic Functions on Bounded SetsResearch Paper

Motivation

The Łojasiewicz inequality states that near a critical point aaa of a real-analytic function fff there are θ∈[0,1)\theta\in[0,1)θ∈[0,1) and CCC with ∣f(x)−f(a)∣θ≤C ∥∇f(x)∥|f(x)-f(a)|^{\theta}\le C\,\|\nabla f(x)\|∣f(x)−f(a)∣θ≤C∥∇f(x)∥. Łojasiewicz used it in the 1960s to prove that every bounded trajectory of the gradient flow x˙=−∇f(x)\dot x=-\nabla f(x)x˙=−∇f(x) has finite length and converges to a single critical point, a conclusion that fails for general C∞C^\inftyC∞ functions. The inequality has since become the standard tool for convergence analysis of descent methods on nonconvex problems.

Optimization problems are, however, rarely smooth: constraints enter through indicator functions, and objectives contain norms, maxima and penalties. Bolte, Daniilidis and Lewis (SIAM J. Optim. 17 (2007) 1205–1223) extended the inequality to nonsmooth subanalytic functions, replacing ∥∇f∥\|\nabla f\|∥∇f∥ by a slope built from the limiting subdifferential. Their Section 3.1 treats functions continuous on a closed domain; Section 3.2, the subject of this mission, treats lower semicontinuous convex functions, which may jump to +∞+\infty+∞ and whose domain need not be closed. The Kurdyka–Łojasiewicz framework built on this paper (Attouch–Bolte–Svaiter 2013; Bolte–Sabach–Teboulle 2014) underlies the convergence theory of proximal and splitting algorithms used throughout operations research.

Setting

Work in Rn\mathbb R^nRn with the Euclidean norm, and let f:Rn→R∪{+∞}f:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb R\cup\{+\infty\}f:Rn→R∪{+∞} with domain dom⁡f={x:f(x)<+∞}\operatorname{dom} f=\{x: f(x)<+\infty\}domf={x:f(x)<+∞}.

A set A⊆RnA\subseteq\mathbb R^nA⊆Rn is semianalytic if near every point it is a finite union of finite intersections of sets {fij=0, gij>0}\{f_{ij}=0,\ g_{ij}>0\}{fij​=0, gij​>0} with fij,gijf_{ij},g_{ij}fij​,gij​ real-analytic. It is subanalytic if near every point it is the projection of a bounded semianalytic subset of Rn×Rm\mathbb R^n\times\mathbb R^mRn×Rm. A function is subanalytic when its graph {(x,λ):f(x)=λ}\{(x,\lambda): f(x)=\lambda\}{(x,λ):f(x)=λ} is. Semialgebraic functions (norms, polynomials, indicators of polyhedra) are subanalytic.

The Fréchet subdifferential ∂^f(x)\hat\partial f(x)∂^f(x) is the set of x∗x^*x∗ with lim inf⁡y→x, y≠x(f(y)−f(x)−⟨x∗,y−x⟩)/∥y−x∥≥0\liminf_{y\to x,\,y\ne x}\big(f(y)-f(x)-\langle x^*,y-x\rangle\big)/\|y-x\|\ge 0liminfy→x,y=x​(f(y)−f(x)−⟨x∗,y−x⟩)/∥y−x∥≥0, for x∈dom⁡fx\in\operatorname{dom} fx∈domf, and is empty otherwise. The limiting subdifferential ∂f(x)\partial f(x)∂f(x) is the set of limits of xk∗∈∂^f(xk)x_k^*\in\hat\partial f(x_k)xk∗​∈∂^f(xk​) with (xk,f(xk))→(x,f(x))(x_k,f(x_k))\to(x,f(x))(xk​,f(xk​))→(x,f(x)). The nonsmooth slope is mf(x)=inf⁡{∥x∗∥:x∗∈∂f(x)}m_f(x)=\inf\{\|x^*\|:x^*\in\partial f(x)\}mf​(x)=inf{∥x∗∥:x∗∈∂f(x)}, equal to +∞+\infty+∞ when ∂f(x)=∅\partial f(x)=\emptyset∂f(x)=∅, and crit⁡f={x:0∈∂f(x)}\operatorname{crit} f=\{x: 0\in\partial f(x)\}critf={x:0∈∂f(x)} is the set of critical points. For lower semicontinuous convex fff, ∂f\partial f∂f is the subdifferential of convex analysis and crit⁡f\operatorname{crit} fcritf is the set of minimizers. Write min⁡f\min fminf for the minimum value and dS(x)d_S(x)dS​(x) for the distance from xxx to S=crit⁡fS=\operatorname{crit} fS=critf. The epigraphical sum g(x)=inf⁡u{f(u)+12∥x−u∥2}g(x)=\inf_u\{f(u)+\tfrac12\|x-u\|^2\}g(x)=infu​{f(u)+21​∥x−u∥2} is the Moreau envelope of fff.

Ratios follow the paper's conventions 00=10^0=100=1 and ∞/∞=0/0=0\infty/\infty=0/0=0∞/∞=0/0=0.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.3

Let fff be lower semicontinuous, convex and subanalytic with crit⁡f≠∅\operatorname{crit} f\ne\emptysetcritf=∅. For every bounded set KKK there is θ∈[0,1)\theta\in[0,1)θ∈[0,1) such that

∣f−min⁡f∣θmfis bounded on K.\frac{|f-\min f|^{\theta}}{m_f}\quad\text{is bounded on }K.mf​∣f−minf∣θ​is bounded on K.

The exponent may depend on KKK; neither θ\thetaθ nor the bound is fixed.

Milestones

  1. Eq. (5): ∂f=∂^f=\partial f=\hat\partial f=∂f=∂^f= the convex subdifferential, for lsc convex fff.
  2. Section 3.2: crit⁡f\operatorname{crit} fcritf is closed, convex and equal to the set of minimizers.
  3. Inequality (16): ∣f(x)−min⁡f∣≤∥x∗∥ dS(x)|f(x)-\min f|\le\|x^*\|\,d_S(x)∣f(x)−minf∣≤∥x∗∥dS​(x) for all x∗∈∂f(x)x^*\in\partial f(x)x∗∈∂f(x).
  4. Remark 3.6: ∣f−min⁡f∣/mf|f-\min f|/m_f∣f−minf∣/mf​ is bounded around every critical point, without subanalyticity.
  5. Proposition 2.9: the epigraphical sum ggg is C1C^1C1 and subanalytic when inf⁡f∈R\inf f\in\mathbb Rinff∈R.
  6. Properties (a)–(c): ggg is finite and C1C^1C1, g≤fg\le fg≤f, crit⁡g=crit⁡f\operatorname{crit} g=\operatorname{crit} fcritg=critf, inf⁡g=inf⁡f\inf g=\inf finfg=inff.
  7. Proposition 2.13(ii): crit⁡f\operatorname{crit} fcritf is subanalytic for subanalytic fff that is relatively bounded on its domain.
  8. Section 2.1: the distance to a subanalytic set is subanalytic.
  9. The Łojasiewicz factorization lemma on compact sets (recalled from Bierstone–Milman).
  10. Inequality (15): dS(x)≤c−1/r∣f(x)−min⁡f∣1/rd_S(x)\le c^{-1/r}|f(x)-\min f|^{1/r}dS​(x)≤c−1/r∣f(x)−minf∣1/r on KKK, with r>1r>1r>1, c>0c>0c>0.
  11. Remark 3.5: the growth condition ∣f−min⁡f∣≥c dS r|f-\min f|\ge c\,d_S^{\,r}∣f−minf∣≥cdSr​ on a compact KKK alone yields a Łojasiewicz inequality at critical points interior to KKK.

Significance

Theorem 3.3 gives, for convex subanalytic functions, a Łojasiewicz inequality that is uniform on bounded sets rather than local at one critical point, and it needs neither continuity of fff on its domain nor a closed domain. Remark 3.4 of the paper exhibits a convex function covered by Theorem 3.3 but not by the continuous-case Theorem 3.1. Through inequality (20) of Section 4, it yields finite length and convergence rates for the subgradient flow x˙∈−∂f(x)\dot x\in-\partial f(x)x˙∈−∂f(x) of such functions. The intermediate inequality (15) is a Hölderian error bound, dS≤C∣f−min⁡f∣1/rd_S\le C|f-\min f|^{1/r}dS​≤C∣f−minf∣1/r, of the kind that drives linear and sublinear rate analyses of first-order methods.

The result is proved in the paper; no machine-checked version of it, or of the nonsmooth Łojasiewicz inequality in any form, is known. Formalizing it would add to the library: subanalytic sets and functions, the limiting subdifferential of convex functions and its agreement with the classical one, the Moreau envelope with its critical points and infimum, and the passage from a growth condition to a Łojasiewicz inequality. Remarks 3.5 and 3.6 isolate parts that need no subanalytic geometry at all.

Difficulty

The convex-analysis steps (inequality (16), properties of the Moreau envelope) are classical. The obstacle is subanalytic geometry. The natural first idea, applying the Łojasiewicz factorization lemma directly to f−min⁡ff-\min ff−minf and dSd_SdS​, fails: fff is neither continuous nor finite, and its domain need not be subanalytic even when fff is convex and subanalytic (Example 2.5 of the paper). The milestones route through the Moreau envelope, which is continuous and finite, but subanalyticity is not preserved by infima over unbounded sets, so the subanalyticity of the envelope (Proposition 2.9) needs a localization argument. The subanalyticity of crit⁡g\operatorname{crit} gcritg and of dSd_SdS​ rests on the stability theory of subanalytic sets (Gabrielov's complement theorem, the projection theorem for globally subanalytic sets), none of which exists in Mathlib.

Formalization scope

The space is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n). Functions take values in EReal; "lower semicontinuous, convex, somewhere finite and never −∞-\infty−∞" is the published definition MoreauProx.Characterization.GammaZero, whose convexity is convexity of the epigraph. The Fréchet and limiting subdifferentials are the published NonconvexSplitting.Shared.IsRegularSubgrad and LimitingSubdiff; the convex subdifferential subgrad appears only in Eq. (5), which proves the agreement and is never assumed. Semianalytic and subanalytic sets are defined from scratch for any finite-dimensional real normed space, so that one definition serves Rn\mathbb R^nRn and its products; global subanalyticity is not defined. min⁡f\min fminf is written inf⁡yf(y)\inf_y f(y)infy​f(y) in EReal and converted to a real number only where it is finite. The bounded ratio (14) is encoded as "∣f(x)−min⁡f∣θ≤C∥x∗∥|f(x)-\min f|^{\theta}\le C\|x^*\|∣f(x)−minf∣θ≤C∥x∗∥ for every x∈Kx\in Kx∈K and every x∗∈∂f(x)x^*\in\partial f(x)x∗∈∂f(x)", with real powers (Real.rpow, 00=10^0=100=1). Inequalities (15) and (17) are imposed only where f(x)<+∞f(x)<+\inftyf(x)<+∞, since Lean sends +∞+\infty+∞ to 000 under toReal.

Trivializing encodings are ruled out: the goal is stated with the limiting subdifferential rather than an assumed convex subdifferential, the slope is never computed in ℝ≥0∞ where 0⋅∞=00\cdot\infty=00⋅∞=0 would make the ratio vacuous, and θ\thetaθ remains existential in [0,1)[0,1)[0,1) with the quantifier order "for every KKK there is θ\thetaθ", so that θ=0\theta=0θ=0 is excluded at critical points in KKK by 00=10^0=100=1.

A complete development needs a working theory of subanalytic sets (stability under finite unions, complements, closure, projections of bounded sets, the factorization lemma), the Moreau envelope of a convex function on Rn\mathbb R^nRn and its C1C^1C1 property, and the convex-analytic description of the limiting subdifferential. The subanalytic-geometry layer and the Moreau-envelope facts are reusable well beyond this mission; contributions to either, or proofs of the convex-only milestones (Eq. (5), (16), Remarks 3.5–3.6), are welcome independently.

Selected references

  • J. Bolte, A. Daniilidis, A. Lewis, The Łojasiewicz inequality for nonsmooth subanalytic functions with applications to subgradient dynamical systems, SIAM J. Optim. 17(4) (2007) 1205–1223. https://doi.org/10.1137/050644641
  • E. Bierstone, P. D. Milman, Semianalytic and subanalytic sets, Publ. Math. IHÉS 67 (1988) 5–42. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02699126
  • R. T. Rockafellar, R. J.-B. Wets, Variational Analysis, Springer, 1998. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-02431-3
  • S. Łojasiewicz, Une propriété topologique des sous-ensembles analytiques réels, Les Équations aux Dérivées Partielles, Éditions du CNRS, Paris, 1963, 87–89.
  • H. Attouch, J. Bolte, B. F. Svaiter, Convergence of descent methods for semi-algebraic and tame problems, Math. Program. 137 (2013) 91–129. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-011-0484-9
  • J. Bolte, S. Sabach, M. Teboulle, Proximal alternating linearized minimization for nonconvex and nonsmooth problems, Math. Program. 146 (2014) 459–494. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-013-0701-9
18 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

The Łojasiewicz Inequality for Nonsmooth Subanalytic Functions with Applications to Subgradient Dynamical Systems I: The Łojasiewicz Inequality at Critical Points of Continuous Subanalytic FunctionsResearch Paper

Motivation

For a real-analytic function f:U→Rf : U \to \mathbb{R}f:U→R on an open set U⊆RnU \subseteq \mathbb{R}^nU⊆Rn and a critical point aaa (so ∇f(a)=0\nabla f(a) = 0∇f(a)=0), the Łojasiewicz gradient inequality says that there is an exponent θ∈[0,1)\theta \in [0,1)θ∈[0,1) such that ∣f−f(a)∣θ/∥∇f∥|f - f(a)|^{\theta} / \|\nabla f\|∣f−f(a)∣θ/∥∇f∥ stays bounded near aaa. It is the standard tool for proving that bounded gradient trajectories x˙=−∇f(x)\dot x = -\nabla f(x)x˙=−∇f(x) have finite length and converge to a single critical point, and, in its descendants (the Kurdyka–Łojasiewicz property), for proving convergence of the whole iterate sequence of nonconvex descent methods: proximal gradient, alternating minimization, PALM, ADMM. Those algorithmic results all assume a nonsmooth version of the inequality, for functions that may take the value +∞+\infty+∞ and are not differentiable.

Bolte, Daniilidis and Lewis (SIAM J. Optim. 17 (2007)) supplied that nonsmooth version. This mission formalizes their first main result, Theorem 3.1: the inequality at critical points of subanalytic functions that are continuous on a closed domain.

Timeline.

  • 1963: Łojasiewicz proves the inequality for real-analytic functions (Une propriété topologique des sous-ensembles analytiques réels), and in 1984 derives convergence of bounded analytic gradient trajectories.
  • 1998: Kurdyka (Ann. Inst. Fourier 48) extends it to C1C^1C1 functions definable in an o-minimal structure, with a desingularizing function in place of the power.
  • 2006: Bolte, Daniilidis and Lewis prove a nonsmooth Sard theorem (J. Math. Anal. Appl. 321): a subanalytic function continuous on its closed domain is constant on each connected component of its critical set.
  • 2007: The present paper proves the nonsmooth inequality for continuous subanalytic functions (Theorem 3.1) and for lower semicontinuous convex ones (Theorem 3.3).
  • 2007: Bolte, Daniilidis, Lewis and Shiota (SIAM J. Optim. 18) extend it to lower semicontinuous functions definable in o-minimal structures (the KL property).

Setting

Write Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn with its Euclidean norm. A function f:Rn→R∪{+∞}f : \mathbb{R}^n \to \mathbb{R} \cup \{+\infty\}f:Rn→R∪{+∞} has domain dom⁡f={x:f(x)<+∞}\operatorname{dom} f = \{x : f(x) < +\infty\}domf={x:f(x)<+∞}.

Subanalytic sets (Definition 2.1). A set A⊆RnA \subseteq \mathbb{R}^nA⊆Rn is semianalytic if every point of Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn has a neighbourhood VVV on which A∩V=⋃i=1p⋂j=1q{x∈V:fij(x)=0, gij(x)>0}A \cap V = \bigcup_{i=1}^{p}\bigcap_{j=1}^{q}\{x \in V : f_{ij}(x) = 0,\ g_{ij}(x) > 0\}A∩V=⋃i=1p​⋂j=1q​{x∈V:fij​(x)=0, gij​(x)>0} with fij,gijf_{ij}, g_{ij}fij​,gij​ real-analytic on VVV. It is subanalytic if every point of Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn has a neighbourhood VVV such that A∩VA \cap VA∩V is the projection onto Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn of a bounded semianalytic subset of Rn×Rm\mathbb{R}^n \times \mathbb{R}^mRn×Rm, m≥1m \ge 1m≥1. A function fff is subanalytic if its graph {(x,λ)∈Rn×R:f(x)=λ}\{(x,\lambda) \in \mathbb{R}^n \times \mathbb{R} : f(x) = \lambda\}{(x,λ)∈Rn×R:f(x)=λ} is subanalytic. Semialgebraic functions, and functions locally built from analytic ones by finitely many algebraic operations, max/min and compositions, are subanalytic.

Subdifferentials (Definition 2.10). The Fréchet subdifferential ∂^f(x)\hat\partial f(x)∂^f(x) is the set of x∗x^*x∗ with lim inf⁡y→x, y≠xf(y)−f(x)−⟨x∗,y−x⟩∥y−x∥≥0\liminf_{y \to x,\, y \ne x} \frac{f(y) - f(x) - \langle x^*, y - x\rangle}{\|y - x\|} \ge 0liminfy→x,y=x​∥y−x∥f(y)−f(x)−⟨x∗,y−x⟩​≥0 (empty off dom⁡f\operatorname{dom} fdomf). The limiting subdifferential ∂f(x)\partial f(x)∂f(x) is the set of limits of xk∗∈∂^f(xk)x^*_k \in \hat\partial f(x_k)xk∗​∈∂^f(xk​) along xk→xx_k \to xxk​→x with f(xk)→f(x)f(x_k) \to f(x)f(xk​)→f(x).

Slope and critical points. The nonsmooth slope is mf(x)=inf⁡{∥x∗∥:x∗∈∂f(x)}m_f(x) = \inf\{\|x^*\| : x^* \in \partial f(x)\}mf​(x)=inf{∥x∗∥:x∗∈∂f(x)}, equal to +∞+\infty+∞ when ∂f(x)=∅\partial f(x) = \emptyset∂f(x)=∅ (equation (4)). The critical set is crit⁡f={x:0∈∂f(x)}\operatorname{crit} f = \{x : 0 \in \partial f(x)\}critf={x:0∈∂f(x)} (Definition 2.11).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.1

Let fff be subanalytic with closed domain and f∣dom⁡ff|_{\operatorname{dom} f}f∣domf​ continuous, and let a∈crit⁡fa \in \operatorname{crit} fa∈critf. Then there is θ∈[0,1)\theta \in [0,1)θ∈[0,1) such that

∣f−f(a)∣θmf  is bounded around a,\frac{|f - f(a)|^{\theta}}{m_f} \ \text{ is bounded around } a,mf​∣f−f(a)∣θ​  is bounded around a,

with the conventions 00=10^0 = 100=1 and ∞/∞=0/0=0\infty/\infty = 0/0 = 0∞/∞=0/0=0. In division-free form: there are CCC and a neighbourhood UUU of aaa with ∣f(x)−f(a)∣θ≤C∥x∗∥|f(x) - f(a)|^{\theta} \le C\|x^*\|∣f(x)−f(a)∣θ≤C∥x∗∥ for all x∈Ux \in Ux∈U and x∗∈∂f(x)x^* \in \partial f(x)x∗∈∂f(x). The exponent is existential; the goal fixes no value of θ\thetaθ or CCC.

Milestones

  1. Remark 2.12, for fff continuous on a closed domain: the graph of ∂f\partial f∂f is closed; crit⁡f\operatorname{crit} fcritf is closed; mfm_fmf​ is lower semicontinuous; crit⁡f=mf−1(0)\operatorname{crit} f = m_f^{-1}(0)critf=mf−1​(0).
  2. Proposition 2.13(ii), its clause on the critical set: if fff is subanalytic and relatively bounded on its domain, then crit⁡f\operatorname{crit} fcritf is subanalytic.
  3. Equation (6), recalled from the nonsmooth Sard theorem: fff is constant on the connected component of crit⁡f\operatorname{crit} fcritf containing aaa.
  4. The curve selection lemma, recalled from Bierstone–Milman: a boundary point of a subanalytic set is the origin of an analytic arc entering the set.

Significance

The result. Theorem 3.1 is the nonsmooth Łojasiewicz inequality at critical points. With the subgradient in place of the gradient, it yields finite length of bounded trajectories of subgradient systems x˙∈−∂f(x)\dot x \in -\partial f(x)x˙∈−∂f(x) (Section 4 of the paper) and is the template for the Kurdyka–Łojasiewicz property that underlies convergence proofs for proximal and splitting methods on nonconvex, nonsmooth problems (e.g. Attouch–Bolte–Redont–Soubeyran 2010, Bolte–Sabach–Teboulle 2014). Those papers assume the KL property and cite this line of results to know it holds for semialgebraic and subanalytic objectives.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved; this mission produces a machine-checked proof. To our knowledge no proof assistant has a formal definition of subanalytic sets or of the nonsmooth Łojasiewicz inequality. The definitions layer (semianalytic and subanalytic sets, the slope, the inequality) is reusable by any later formalization of KL-based convergence analyses, and the milestones on Remark 2.12 are general facts about limiting subdifferentials that apply well beyond subanalytic geometry.

Difficulty

The obvious argument restricts fff and mfm_fmf​ to an analytic curve and compares their Puiseux expansions. That step needs three pieces of subanalytic geometry that no library has: curve selection, the structure of one-variable subanalytic functions (monotonicity and Puiseux expansions), and the fact that the sets built in the proof (sets of points with a subgradient satisfying an inequality, level-wise infima of mfm_fmf​) are again subanalytic, which in the paper goes through global subanalyticity and the projection theorem. The second obstacle is that fff is not smooth: the classical proof differentiates fff along a curve, while here only Fréchet subgradients are available, and the chain rule along an analytic curve holds only almost everywhere. The constancy of fff on critical components, equation (6), is itself a nonsmooth Sard-type theorem whose published proof uses stratification. A solver who replaces subanalytic by semialgebraic, or assumes fff real-valued and C1C^1C1, proves a different and much weaker statement.

Formalization scope

  • Space and values. The space is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n). The function is f : E → EReal with f x ≠ ⊥ for every x. The domain is {x | f x ≠ ⊤}; it is assumed closed, and f is assumed ContinuousOn it.
  • Subdifferentials. ∂^f\hat\partial f∂^f and ∂f\partial f∂f are the published platform definitions NonconvexSplitting.Shared.IsRegularSubgrad and LimitingSubdiff, which match Definition 2.10 for functions never equal to −∞-\infty−∞.
  • Subanalyticity. It is defined on any finite-dimensional real normed space, so that the same definition covers Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn, Rn×R\mathbb{R}^n \times \mathbb{R}Rn×R and Rn×Rm\mathbb{R}^n \times \mathbb{R}^mRn×Rm. Analyticity is AnalyticOnNhd ℝ. The boundedness of the semianalytic set in Definition 2.1(ii) is part of the definition: without it every projection of a semianalytic set would count.
  • Slope. The slope is valued in [0,+∞][0,+\infty][0,+∞], with +∞+\infty+∞ on points without subgradients.
  • The inequality. It is the predicate LojIneqAt f a θ: one constant CCC and one neighbourhood of aaa, quantified over all limiting subgradients. Under 00=10^0 = 100=1 the value θ=0\theta = 0θ=0 never works at a critical point, as under the paper's conventions.
  • Not assumed. The goal does not assume lower semicontinuity, real values, global subanalyticity, compactness of the critical set, or f(a)=0f(a) = 0f(a)=0. These are reductions inside the paper's proof. Any formalization that adds them, fixes θ\thetaθ, or replaces the class of fff by semialgebraic or C1C^1C1 functions trivializes the target.
  • Infrastructure. A complete proof needs: curve selection; the monotonicity lemma and Puiseux expansions for one-variable globally subanalytic functions; the projection theorem or an equivalent definability argument; the nonsmooth Sard theorem (6); and a chain rule for Fréchet subgradients along analytic curves. Each of these is welcome as a separate contribution, and the subanalytic-geometry results are reusable well beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • J. Bolte, A. Daniilidis, A. Lewis, The Łojasiewicz inequality for nonsmooth subanalytic functions with applications to subgradient dynamical systems, SIAM J. Optim. 17 (2007) 1205–1223. https://doi.org/10.1137/050644641
  • J. Bolte, A. Daniilidis, A. Lewis, A Sard theorem for non-differentiable functions, J. Math. Anal. Appl. 321 (2006) 729–740.
  • E. Bierstone, P. Milman, Semianalytic and subanalytic sets, Publ. Math. IHÉS 67 (1988) 5–42. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02699126
  • K. Kurdyka, On gradients of functions definable in o-minimal structures, Ann. Inst. Fourier 48 (1998) 769–783. https://doi.org/10.5802/aif.1638
  • J. Bolte, A. Daniilidis, A. Lewis, M. Shiota, Clarke subgradients of stratifiable functions, SIAM J. Optim. 18 (2007) 556–572. https://doi.org/10.1137/060670080
  • S. Łojasiewicz, Une propriété topologique des sous-ensembles analytiques réels, in Les Équations aux Dérivées Partielles, CNRS, Paris, 1963, 87–89.
  • R. T. Rockafellar, R. J.-B. Wets, Variational Analysis, Grundlehren 317, Springer, 1998. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-02431-3
12 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Elements of Queueing Theory Ib: Ergodicity and Stochastic IntensityTextbook

Ergodicity and Stochastic Intensity

Background

Chapter 1 of Baccelli and Brémaud's Elements of Queueing Theory has two halves. The first builds Palm calculus from the Matthes definition of P⁰_N and reaches the Swiss army formula. This mission is the second: §§1.6, 1.8 and 1.9, which supply the two things the rest of the book runs on.

Ergodic theory, quoted

§1.6 states, in its own words, "the ergodic theory results to be used later in this book". Five of them, and the book proves none: Birkhoff's pointwise ergodic theorem in discrete (Theorem 1.6.1) and continuous time (Theorem 1.6.4), Kingman's sub-additive ergodic theorem (Theorem 1.6.2), and the extremal characterizations of ergodicity in both settings (Theorems 1.6.3 and 1.6.5) — ergodicity is exactly the impossibility of splitting an invariant probability into two distinct ones.

They are quoted, but they are not decoration. Kingman's theorem is what produces the asymptotic growth rates of Theorem 2.11.2 and the constant γ(c) on which the saturation rule rests. Birkhoff's theorem is what makes the time average in PASTA's (3.3.2) a well-defined object, and what the fluid Loynes theorem invokes for lim_{u→−∞}(A_{u,0} − C_{u,0}) = −∞.

None of the three analytic ones exists in Mathlib. Analysis/InnerProductSpace/MeanErgodic is the mean (von Neumann, L²) theorem, not almost-everywhere convergence, and there is no sub-additive ergodic theorem at all. The platform has neither.

Predictability, and why PASTA can be stated

§1.8 introduces the stochastic intensity: a point process N admits the (P, F_t)-intensity {λ(t)} when E[N(a,b] 1_A] = E[(∫_a^b λ(t)dt) 1_A] for A ∈ F_a. Around it sits the notion of a predictable process — one measurable with respect to the strict past.

Theorem 1.8.1 is the structural fact that makes predictability usable. For the internal history of a marked point process, every predictable process has the concrete form

Z(t, ω) = v(t, θ_t ω),    v(t, ·) F_{0−}-measurable.                                   (1.8.1)

That is why mission IV can take this form as PASTA's hypothesis rather than constructing a predictable σ-field: Theorem 1.8.1 says nothing is lost.

The goal

Theorem 1.8.2 (p.61), §1.8.4, Watanabe's characterization of Poisson processes. For a history F_t = F_t^N ∨ G and a G-measurable, locally integrable {λ(t)}, if N admits the F_t-intensity {λ(t)} then N is a G-conditional Poisson process:

E[ e^{iuN(a,b]} | G ∨ F^N_a ] = exp{ (e^{iu} − 1) ∫_a^b λ(t) dt } .                    (1.8.12)

A stochastic intensity that carries no information beyond G forces the process to be Poisson conditionally on G, with the compensator as the parameter — and the conditional characteristic function is the exact Poisson one, not an approximation. With G trivial and λ constant this is the ordinary Poisson process, which is the equivalence Remark 3.3.1 of Chapter 3 invokes to explain the name PASTA. The book: "This result plays a role in queueing theory, especially for proving that some streams in a queueing network are or are not Poissonian."

Palm probability meets stochastic intensity

§1.9 asks whether the stochastic intensity is the same under P and under P⁰_N — whether the two probabilities describe the same dynamics. Theorem 1.9.1 says yes, on ℝ₊: the same process {λ(t)} serves both.

Theorem 1.9.2 is Papangelou's theorem, and it is the deepest statement of the section: N admits a stochastic intensity if and only if P⁰_N ≪ P on F_{0−}, and then λ(t) = (μ ∘ θ_t)λ with μ the Radon–Nikodým derivative. A dynamic property and a static one turn out to be the same thing.

Theorem 1.9.3 is Mecke's characterization: N is Poisson exactly when P ≡ P⁰_N on F_{0−}. The view from a point of the process and the view from a deterministic instant agree on the strict past precisely when the process has no memory. It follows in one line from the two theorems before it.

What this mission provides

Four of the five missions in this series import the Chapter 1 substrate; this one adds the two pieces they need from its second half — ergodic theory and the stochastic intensity. Nothing here is on the platform, and Mathlib has filtrations and adapted processes but no predictability in this form, no stochastic intensity, no pointwise ergodic theorem and no Kingman.

Formalization scope

Every result is stated in the book's strength, with the book's standing definitions as binders. A discrete flow is a bijective, measurable, P⁰-preserving map (p.46); a continuous flow is jointly measurable in (t, ω) (p.3, clause (a)). A history compatible with the flow satisfies θ_t F_s = F_{s−t} (p.57), and an F_t-intensity is a non-negative, measurable, locally integrable, adapted process (p.58). The limits of Theorems 1.6.1, 1.6.2 and 1.6.4 are asserted to exist; Kingman's constant h̄ lies in ℝ ∪ {−∞} and is identified with inf_n (1/n) E⁰[h_n], the means being extended reals so that E⁰[h_n] = −∞ is not read as 0. Theorems 1.6.3, 1.6.5, 1.9.2 and 1.9.3 are equivalences, and Theorem 1.9.2 carries the closed form λ(t) = (μ ∘ θ_t)λ with μ = dP⁰_N/dP on F_{0−}. The goal's conclusion is the exact conditional characteristic function (1.8.12); a formalization that only asserted some conditional Poisson law, or conditioned on G alone, would not be this theorem.

13 thms2 active usersReviewed
Algebra·Captain: Lucas

Smale's Mean Value ConjectureOpen Problem

Motivation

The mean value problem, also called Smale's mean value conjecture, was posed by Stephen Smale in 1981 in his study of the complexity of root-finding algorithms for polynomials (Smale 1981). For a real differentiable function the mean value theorem produces, between two points, a point where the derivative equals a difference quotient. For a complex polynomial no such point need exist on a segment, and Smale asked for a substitute in which the special point is a critical point of the polynomial (a zero of its derivative). Estimates of this kind control how far Newton-type iterations can move, which is where Smale's original interest came from. The problem appears in lists of unsolved problems in mathematics, including Smale's own list of problems for the next century.

Timeline

  • 1981 — Smale poses the problem and proves the inequality below with constant K=4K = 4K=4 (Smale 1981). The example P(z)=zd−dzP(z) = z^d - dzP(z)=zd−dz shows that the constant cannot be smaller than d−1d\frac{d-1}{d}dd−1​ in degree ddd, so no constant below 111 works in all degrees.
  • 1989 — Tischler proves the inequality with the optimal constant K=d−1dK = \frac{d-1}{d}K=dd−1​ when all roots of PPP are real, and when all roots of PPP have the same absolute value (Tischler 1989).
  • 2007 — Conte, Fujikawa and Lakic prove K≤4d−1d+1K \le 4\frac{d-1}{d+1}K≤4d+1d−1​ (Conte–Fujikawa–Lakic 2007). Crane proves K<4−2.263dK < 4 - \frac{2.263}{\sqrt d}K<4−d​2.263​ for d≥8d \ge 8d≥8 (Crane 2007).
  • 2009 — Dubinin and Sugawa prove the reverse (dual) inequality with constant 1d 4d\frac{1}{d\,4^d}d4d1​ (Dubinin–Sugawa 2009); optimizing this lower bound is the dual mean value problem (Ng–Zhang 2016).

No absolute constant K<4K < 4K<4 is known that works in every degree.

Setting

Let PPP be a polynomial with complex coefficients of degree d≥2d \ge 2d≥2, and write P′P'P′ for its derivative. A critical point of PPP is a complex number ccc with P′(c)=0P'(c) = 0P′(c)=0; since d≥2d \ge 2d≥2, P′P'P′ is a nonconstant polynomial of degree d−1d-1d−1, so PPP has at least one and at most d−1d-1d−1 distinct critical points. Fix a complex number zzz that is not a critical point, P′(z)≠0P'(z) \ne 0P′(z)=0. For every critical point ccc we then have c≠zc \ne zc=z, and the difference quotient

P(z)−P(c)z−c\frac{P(z) - P(c)}{z - c}z−cP(z)−P(c)​

is well defined. The question is how small this quotient can be made, relative to ∣P′(z)∣|P'(z)|∣P′(z)∣, by choosing the critical point ccc well.

Formalization targets

Goal: Smale's mean value conjecture (K=1K = 1K=1)

For every complex polynomial PPP of degree d≥2d \ge 2d≥2 and every z∈Cz \in \mathbb Cz∈C with P′(z)≠0P'(z) \ne 0P′(z)=0 there is a critical point ccc of PPP with

∣P(z)−P(c)z−c∣≤∣P′(z)∣.\left| \frac{P(z) - P(c)}{z - c} \right| \le |P'(z)|.​z−cP(z)−P(c)​​≤∣P′(z)∣.

Stronger: the optimal constant

The same with ∣P′(z)∣|P'(z)|∣P′(z)∣ replaced by d−1d ∣P′(z)∣\frac{d-1}{d}\,|P'(z)|dd−1​∣P′(z)∣; the example zd−dzz^d - dzzd−dz shows this constant cannot be lowered.

Known results (milestones)

  1. Smale's inequality with K=4K = 4K=4.
  2. The extremal example P(z)=zd−dzP(z) = z^d - dzP(z)=zd−dz at z=0z = 0z=0, where every critical point gives exactly d−1d∣P′(0)∣\frac{d-1}{d}|P'(0)|dd−1​∣P′(0)∣, and its consequence that no constant K<1K < 1K<1 works in all degrees.
  3. Tischler's optimal inequality for polynomials with only real roots, and for polynomials whose roots all have the same absolute value.
  4. The Conte–Fujikawa–Lakic bound K≤4d−1d+1K \le 4\frac{d-1}{d+1}K≤4d+1d−1​.
  5. Crane's bound K<4−2.263dK < 4 - \frac{2.263}{\sqrt d}K<4−d​2.263​ for d≥8d \ge 8d≥8.
  6. The Dubinin–Sugawa dual inequality ∣P(z)−P(c)z−c∣≥∣P′(z)∣d 4d\left|\frac{P(z)-P(c)}{z-c}\right| \ge \frac{|P'(z)|}{d\,4^d}​z−cP(z)−P(c)​​≥d4d∣P′(z)∣​ for some critical point ccc.

Significance

The result itself. A positive answer gives a sharp, degree-independent mean value inequality for complex polynomials: for every non-critical point, some critical value is reachable along a chord whose slope is at most the local derivative. Bounds of this type feed into the analysis of Newton's method and of path-following root finders, and into the study of how critical values of a polynomial are distributed relative to its values. The conjecture is part of a family of open extremal problems on the geometry of critical points, alongside Sendov's conjecture.

Formalizing it. The goal and the optimal-constant form are open. The milestones are published theorems, none of which is known to have a machine-checked proof. Formalizing Smale's K=4K = 4K=4 bound and Tischler's special cases would put the classical tools of the subject (critical points of polynomials, univalent function estimates, root location) on a formal footing that later attempts can reuse.

Difficulty

The obvious strategies control the quotient through one critical point at a time: for instance, bounding ∣P(z)−P(c)∣|P(z) - P(c)|∣P(z)−P(c)∣ by integrating P′P'P′ along the segment from ccc to zzz. Such estimates lose a constant factor that depends on how the critical points are spread out, and the known uniform arguments all pass through distortion theorems for univalent functions, whose constants lead to KKK close to 444. Reaching K=1K = 1K=1 requires using all critical points simultaneously, and no argument doing this in every degree is known. The equality case zd−dzz^d - dzzd−dz, in which every critical point is equally bad, shows that any successful argument must be sharp for polynomials with maximally symmetric critical configurations.

Formalization scope

Polynomials are elements of ℂ[X] (Mathlib's Polynomial ℂ); the degree is natDegree, the derivative is Polynomial.derivative, evaluation is Polynomial.eval, and the roots of PPP are the multiset P.roots (counted with multiplicity). A critical point is a c : ℂ with P.derivative.eval c = 0. The absolute value is the norm ‖·‖ on ℂ, and the constants d−1d\frac{d-1}{d}dd−1​ and 4d−1d+14\frac{d-1}{d+1}4d+1d−1​ are computed in ℝ from the cast of natDegree.

Every statement assumes P′(z)≠0P'(z) \ne 0P′(z)=0. This is the standard normalization and is essential in Lean: division by zero returns 000, so without it the choice c=zc = zc=z would make the inequality trivially true whenever zzz is itself a critical point. With the hypothesis, every critical point ccc differs from zzz and the quotient is a genuine difference quotient.

Crane's bound is stated as the existence, for each degree d≥8d \ge 8d≥8, of a constant strictly below 4−2.263d4 - \frac{2.263}{\sqrt d}4−d​2.263​ that works for all polynomials of degree exactly ddd; this is equivalent to the best constant in degree ddd being strictly below that value.

A complete development needs basic facts on critical points of complex polynomials (existence, the Gauss–Lucas theorem), and, for the classical bounds, results from the theory of univalent functions such as the Koebe quarter theorem and coefficient estimates. These are reusable well beyond this mission. Contributions of any milestone, of supporting lemmas, and of partial results in fixed small degree are welcome.

Selected references

  • S. Smale, The fundamental theorem of algebra and complexity theory, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. (N.S.) 4 (1981), 1–36. https://doi.org/10.1090/S0273-0979-1981-14858-8
  • D. Tischler, Critical points and values of complex polynomials, J. Complexity 5 (1989), 438–456. https://doi.org/10.1016/0885-064X(89)90019-8
  • A. Conte, E. Fujikawa, N. Lakic, Smale's mean value conjecture and the coefficients of univalent functions, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 135 (2007), 3295–3300. https://doi.org/10.1090/S0002-9939-07-08861-2
  • E. Crane, A bound for Smale's mean value conjecture for complex polynomials, Bull. London Math. Soc. 39 (2007), 781–791. https://doi.org/10.1112/blms/bdm063
  • V. Dubinin, T. Sugawa, Dual mean value problem for complex polynomials, Proc. Japan Acad. Ser. A 85 (2009), 135–137. https://arxiv.org/abs/0906.4605
  • T.-W. Ng, Y. Zhang, Smale's mean value conjecture for finite Blaschke products, J. Anal. 24 (2016), 331–345. https://arxiv.org/abs/1609.00170
  • Wikipedia, Mean value problem. https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Mean_value_problem&oldid=1374678764
10 thms2 active usersReviewed
Control TheoryPartial Differential Equations·Captain: mikedeng1

Stability and Instability Results of the Wave Equation with a Delay Term in the Boundary or Internal Feedbacks IV: Arbitrarily Small Destabilizing Delays for Internal DampingResearch Paper

Motivation

Feedback laws in engineering are applied with a lag: sensors, actuators and communication channels introduce a time delay τ\tauτ between the measurement of a state and the control that reacts to it. For finite-dimensional systems small delays are usually harmless. For distributed systems such as the wave equation they need not be: Datko, Lagnese and Polis (SIAM J. Control Optim. 24, 1986) and Datko (SIAM J. Control Optim. 26, 1988) showed, for one-dimensional examples, that an arbitrarily small delay in a stabilizing feedback can destroy stability. The question matters to anyone who designs boundary or internal controllers for vibrating structures and wants to know whether a stabilizing law is robust to delay.

Nicaise and Pignotti (SIAM J. Control Optim. 45 (2006)) study the wave equation on a bounded domain of Rn\mathbb R^nRn with a damping term that combines an instantaneous and a delayed velocity feedback, with coefficients μ1\mu_1μ1​ and μ2\mu_2μ2​. They show that the system is exponentially stable when μ2<μ1\mu_2 < \mu_1μ2​<μ1​ (Theorems 1.1 and 1.3), and that when μ2≥μ1\mu_2 \ge \mu_1μ2​≥μ1​ stability can fail (Theorems 1.2 and 1.4). This mission is Theorem 1.4, the internal-damping instability result, in the case the paper proves.

  • 1986–1988: Datko, Lagnese and Polis; Datko — destabilization by small delays in one-dimensional boundary-damped wave equations.
  • 2006: Nicaise and Pignotti — the multi-dimensional dichotomy μ2<μ1\mu_2 < \mu_1μ2​<μ1​ (stability) versus μ2≥μ1\mu_2 \ge \mu_1μ2​≥μ1​ (instability for some delays), for boundary and internal feedback.

Setting

Let n≥1n \ge 1n≥1 and let Ω⊂Rn\Omega \subset \mathbb R^nΩ⊂Rn be a bounded open set with boundary Γ\GammaΓ of class C2C^2C2, split as Γ=ΓD∪ΓN\Gamma = \Gamma_D \cup \Gamma_NΓ=ΓD​∪ΓN​ with ΓD‾∩ΓN‾=∅\overline{\Gamma_D} \cap \overline{\Gamma_N} = \emptysetΓD​​∩ΓN​​=∅ and ΓD≠∅\Gamma_D \neq \emptysetΓD​=∅. Write ν\nuν for the outer unit normal and ∂u/∂ν\partial u/\partial\nu∂u/∂ν for the normal derivative. Let μ1>0\mu_1 > 0μ1​>0, μ2>0\mu_2 > 0μ2​>0 and let τ>0\tau > 0τ>0 be the delay. With damping coefficient a≡1a \equiv 1a≡1 the problem is

utt(x,t)−Δu(x,t)+μ1ut(x,t)+μ2ut(x,t−τ)=0in Ω×(0,∞),u_{tt}(x,t) - \Delta u(x,t) + \mu_1 u_t(x,t) + \mu_2 u_t(x,t-\tau) = 0 \quad \text{in } \Omega \times (0,\infty),utt​(x,t)−Δu(x,t)+μ1​ut​(x,t)+μ2​ut​(x,t−τ)=0in Ω×(0,∞), u=0  on ΓD×(0,∞),∂u∂ν=0  on ΓN×(0,∞),u = 0 \ \text{ on } \Gamma_D \times (0,\infty), \qquad \frac{\partial u}{\partial\nu} = 0 \ \text{ on } \Gamma_N \times (0,\infty),u=0  on ΓD​×(0,∞),∂ν∂u​=0  on ΓN​×(0,∞),

with initial data u(⋅,0)=u0u(\cdot,0) = u_0u(⋅,0)=u0​, ut(⋅,0)=u1u_t(\cdot,0) = u_1ut​(⋅,0)=u1​ and a history ut=g0u_t = g_0ut​=g0​ on Ω×(−τ,0)\Omega \times (-\tau, 0)Ω×(−τ,0). The standard energy of a solution is

E(t)=12∫Ω{∣ut(x,t)∣2+∣∇u(x,t)∣2} dx.\mathcal E(t) = \frac12 \int_\Omega \big\{ |u_t(x,t)|^2 + |\nabla u(x,t)|^2 \big\}\,dx .E(t)=21​∫Ω​{∣ut​(x,t)∣2+∣∇u(x,t)∣2}dx.

The condition μ2<μ1\mu_2 < \mu_1μ2​<μ1​ is the paper's assumption (1.8). The paper's problem (1.12)–(1.16) carries a general coefficient a∈L∞(Ω)a \in L^\infty(\Omega)a∈L∞(Ω) with a≥0a \ge 0a≥0 and a>a0>0a > a_0 > 0a>a0​>0 near ΓN\Gamma_NΓN​; a≡1a \equiv 1a≡1 is one such coefficient.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1.4 for a≡1a \equiv 1a≡1

If (1.8) fails, i.e. 0<μ1≤μ20 < \mu_1 \le \mu_20<μ1​≤μ2​, then

∀ε>0 ∃τ∈(0,ε) ∃u solving the problem with delay τ:  E(t)↛0 (t→∞),\forall \varepsilon > 0\ \exists \tau \in (0,\varepsilon)\ \exists u \text{ solving the problem with delay } \tau:\ \ \mathcal E(t) \not\to 0 \ (t \to \infty),∀ε>0 ∃τ∈(0,ε) ∃u solving the problem with delay τ:  E(t)→0 (t→∞),

and the same holds with "τ∈(0,ε)\tau \in (0,\varepsilon)τ∈(0,ε)" replaced by "τ>M\tau > Mτ>M", for every MMM. The goal asserts only non-decay, not a rate of growth or the value of the energy, so it survives any sharpening of the examples.

Milestones

  1. (5.21)–(5.23): if φ\varphiφ is an eigenfunction of the mixed Dirichlet–Neumann Laplacian, Δφ=−Λ2φ\Delta\varphi = -\Lambda^2\varphiΔφ=−Λ2φ, and λ∈C\lambda \in \mathbb Cλ∈C solves λ2+(μ1+μ2e−λτ)λ=−Λ2\lambda^2 + (\mu_1 + \mu_2 e^{-\lambda\tau})\lambda = -\Lambda^2λ2+(μ1​+μ2​e−λτ)λ=−Λ2, then eλtφ(x)e^{\lambda t}\varphi(x)eλtφ(x) is a solution.
  2. (5.24)–(5.25): with λ=α+iβ\lambda = \alpha + i\betaλ=α+iβ and βτ=(2l+1)π\beta\tau = (2l+1)\piβτ=(2l+1)π, that equation is equivalent to α2+β2=Λ2\alpha^2 + \beta^2 = \Lambda^2α2+β2=Λ2, μ2e−ατ=2α+μ1\mu_2 e^{-\alpha\tau} = 2\alpha + \mu_1μ2​e−ατ=2α+μ1​.
  3. Case (a), μ1=μ2\mu_1 = \mu_2μ1​=μ2​: the system forces α=0\alpha = 0α=0 and β2=Λ2\beta^2 = \Lambda^2β2=Λ2.
  4. Case (b), μ2>μ1\mu_2 > \mu_1μ2​>μ1​, (5.26)–(5.27): for every Λ>0\Lambda > 0Λ>0 and lll there is α∈(0,(μ2−μ1)/2)\alpha \in (0, (\mu_2-\mu_1)/2)α∈(0,(μ2​−μ1​)/2) with τ(α)=α−1ln⁡(μ2/(μ1+2α))>0\tau(\alpha) = \alpha^{-1}\ln(\mu_2/(\mu_1+2\alpha)) > 0τ(α)=α−1ln(μ2​/(μ1​+2α))>0 solving the system.
  5. Energy of separated solutions (p. 1584): E(t)=e2 Re(λ)t E(0)\mathcal E(t) = e^{2\,\mathrm{Re}(\lambda)t}\,\mathcal E(0)E(t)=e2Re(λ)tE(0) with E(0)>0\mathcal E(0) > 0E(0)>0.
  6. Delay bounds (p. 1585, corrected): (2l+1)π/Λ<τ<(2l+1)π/Λ2−(μ2−μ1)2/4(2l+1)\pi/\Lambda < \tau < (2l+1)\pi/\sqrt{\Lambda^2 - (\mu_2-\mu_1)^2/4}(2l+1)π/Λ<τ<(2l+1)π/Λ2−(μ2​−μ1​)2/4​, the second when Λ2>(μ2−μ1)2/4\Lambda^2 > (\mu_2-\mu_1)^2/4Λ2>(μ2​−μ1​)2/4.

Significance

The result shows that the stability threshold μ2<μ1\mu_2 < \mu_1μ2​<μ1​ of Theorem 1.3 is sharp in the sense that matters for design: at or beyond the threshold there is no delay margin, since delays as small as desired already produce solutions whose energy does not decay. Together with Theorem 1.3 it gives a complete dichotomy in the coefficients (μ1,μ2)(\mu_1,\mu_2)(μ1​,μ2​) for the internally damped wave equation with delay, in any dimension, and it identifies the mechanism (roots of the characteristic equation on or to the right of the imaginary axis) that later work on delayed stabilization has had to avoid.

The result is proved in the paper; to the best of current knowledge it has not been machine-checked. The mission's product is a formal proof of the a≡1a \equiv 1a≡1 case together with its algebraic core: the reduction of the transcendental characteristic equation, the analysis of both cases, and the two-sided bounds on the delays. The spectral input it needs, an unbounded sequence of eigenvalues of the mixed Dirichlet–Neumann Laplacian with regular eigenfunctions, is reusable well beyond this paper.

Difficulty

The scalar part is elementary. The difficulty is the spectral input. The small delays come from τn,l≈(2l+1)π/Λn\tau_{n,l} \approx (2l+1)\pi/\Lambda_nτn,l​≈(2l+1)π/Λn​ with Λn→∞\Lambda_n \to \inftyΛn​→∞, so the proof needs infinitely many eigenvalues Λn2→∞\Lambda_n^2 \to \inftyΛn2​→∞ of the Laplacian with mixed Dirichlet–Neumann conditions on a C2C^2C2 domain, with eigenfunctions that are C2C^2C2 inside and C1C^1C1 up to the boundary. This requires compactness of the embedding HΓD1(Ω)↪L2(Ω)H^1_{\Gamma_D}(\Omega) \hookrightarrow L^2(\Omega)HΓD​1​(Ω)↪L2(Ω), the spectral theorem for compact self-adjoint operators, and elliptic regularity for a mixed problem, none of which is available in Mathlib for domains in Rn\mathbb R^nRn. A single eigenpair gives only the large delays (letting l→∞l \to \inftyl→∞); it does not give the small ones.

A second point: the paper's own bound (2l+1)2π2/τn,l2≤Λn2(2l+1)^2\pi^2/\tau_{n,l}^2 \le \Lambda_n^2(2l+1)2π2/τn,l2​≤Λn2​ bounds τn,l\tau_{n,l}τn,l​ only from below, so it does not by itself give τn,l→0\tau_{n,l} \to 0τn,l​→0; the upper bound of milestone 6 is needed.

Formalization scope

  • Space: Rn\mathbb R^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) with n≥1n \ge 1n≥1. The C2C^2C2 boundary is given by a global C2C^2C2 defining function ψ\psiψ (Ω={ψ<0}\Omega = \{\psi < 0\}Ω={ψ<0}, ∂Ω={ψ=0}\partial\Omega = \{\psi = 0\}∂Ω={ψ=0}, ∇ψ≠0\nabla\psi \ne 0∇ψ=0 on ∂Ω\partial\Omega∂Ω); ν=∇ψ/∣∇ψ∣\nu = \nabla\psi/|\nabla\psi|ν=∇ψ/∣∇ψ∣; the surface measure is pinned by the Gauss–Green formula for all C1C^1C1 fields.
  • Solutions are complex valued functions u(x,t)u(x,t)u(x,t) defined for all t∈Rt \in \mathbb Rt∈R, C2C^2C2 on Ω×R\Omega \times \mathbb RΩ×R and C1C^1C1 on Ω‾×R\overline\Omega \times \mathbb RΩ×R; the equation and boundary conditions hold for t>0t > 0t>0; initial data and history are the traces of uuu. The Neumann condition uses the derivative within Ω‾\overline\OmegaΩ. ∣∇u∣2|\nabla u|^2∣∇u∣2 is the sum of the squared moduli of the partial derivatives.
  • Corrected scope: Theorem 1.4 is printed for a general aaa satisfying (1.17)–(1.18); §5.2 proves it only for a≡1a \equiv 1a≡1, which is what is stated.
  • Corrected slips: (5.22) prints Δφ=−μ2φ\Delta\varphi = -\mu^2\varphiΔφ=−μ2φ for −Λ2φ-\Lambda^2\varphi−Λ2φ; p. 1584 prints eα+iβφ(x)e^{\alpha+i\beta}\varphi(x)eα+iβφ(x) for e(α+iβ)tφ(x)e^{(\alpha+i\beta)t}\varphi(x)e(α+iβ)tφ(x); the p. 1585 bound is supplemented by the upper bound of milestone 6. Milestone texts are quoted verbatim, including the slips.
  • The standing hypotheses (1.6)–(1.7) and the constant ξ\xiξ of (1.10) are not used by §5.2 and are omitted, which strengthens the statements.
  • A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the goal's conclusion E↛0\mathcal E \not\to 0E→0 excludes u≡0u \equiv 0u≡0, the energy integrand is continuous on the compact Ω‾\overline\OmegaΩ so the integral is genuine, and the normal derivative is taken within Ω‾\overline\OmegaΩ so the Neumann condition is not satisfied by a junk value.
  • No statement assumes the existence of eigenvalues; supplying the spectral theory of the mixed Laplacian is part of the goal. Contributions welcome: the spectral theorem for the mixed Dirichlet–Neumann Laplacian on a bounded C2C^2C2 domain, boundary regularity of its eigenfunctions, and the energy identity for separated solutions.

Selected references

  • S. Nicaise, C. Pignotti, Stability and instability results of the wave equation with a delay term in the boundary or internal feedbacks, SIAM J. Control Optim. 45(5):1561–1585, 2006. https://doi.org/10.1137/060648891
  • R. Datko, Not all feedback stabilized hyperbolic systems are robust with respect to small time delays in their feedbacks, SIAM J. Control Optim. 26:697–713, 1988.
  • R. Datko, J. Lagnese, M. P. Polis, An example on the effect of time delays in boundary feedback stabilization of wave equations, SIAM J. Control Optim. 24:152–156, 1986.
  • P. Grisvard, Elliptic Problems in Nonsmooth Domains, Pitman, 1985 (regularity of mixed boundary value problems).
10 thms2 active usersReviewed
Control TheoryPartial Differential Equations·Captain: mikedeng1

Stability and Instability Results of the Wave Equation with a Delay Term in the Boundary or Internal Feedbacks III: Destabilizing Delays for Boundary FeedbackResearch Paper

Motivation

Boundary feedback stabilization of the wave equation asks whether a damping term placed on part of the boundary drives the energy of every solution to zero. Without delay the answer is classical: the feedback ∂u/∂ν=−μ1ut\partial u/\partial\nu = -\mu_1 u_t∂u/∂ν=−μ1​ut​ on a part ΓN\Gamma_NΓN​ of the boundary gives exponential energy decay under geometric conditions (Chen, Lagnese, Lasiecka–Triggiani, Komornik–Zuazua). In practice a feedback is applied with a lag, and a small lag can destroy stability. Datko, Lagnese and Polis (doi:10.1137/0324007) and Datko (doi:10.1137/0326040) showed, in one space dimension, that a purely delayed boundary feedback destabilizes the system for arbitrarily small delays.

Nicaise and Pignotti (doi:10.1137/060648891) study a feedback made of an instantaneous part and a delayed part, with weights μ1\mu_1μ1​ and μ2\mu_2μ2​, in any space dimension. Their Theorem 1.1 gives exponential decay when μ2<μ1\mu_2 < \mu_1μ2​<μ1​. This mission formalizes the converse, Theorem 1.2: when μ2≥μ1\mu_2 \ge \mu_1μ2​≥μ1​, some delays admit solutions whose energy does not decay at all.

Timeline.

  • 1986: Datko, Lagnese and Polis, a one-dimensional wave equation whose delayed boundary feedback is unstable.
  • 1988: Datko, instability under arbitrarily small delays for a class of hyperbolic systems.
  • 2006: Xu, Yung and Li (doi:10.1051/cocv:2006021), one space dimension, by spectral analysis: stability for μ2<μ1\mu_2 < \mu_1μ2​<μ1​, instability for μ2>μ1\mu_2 > \mu_1μ2​>μ1​, possible instabilities for μ1=μ2\mu_1 = \mu_2μ1​=μ2​.
  • 2006: Nicaise and Pignotti, the same dichotomy in any dimension nnn, with explicit destabilizing delays built from eigenfunctions (§5.1).

Setting

Let n≥1n \ge 1n≥1 and let Ω⊂Rn\Omega \subset \mathbb R^nΩ⊂Rn be a bounded open set with boundary Γ\GammaΓ of class C2C^2C2. The boundary is split as Γ=ΓD∪ΓN\Gamma = \Gamma_D \cup \Gamma_NΓ=ΓD​∪ΓN​, with ΓD‾∩ΓN‾=∅\overline{\Gamma_D} \cap \overline{\Gamma_N} = \emptysetΓD​​∩ΓN​​=∅ and ΓD≠∅\Gamma_D \neq \emptysetΓD​=∅. Write ν\nuν for the outer unit normal and dΓd\GammadΓ for the surface measure. Together these data form a mixed domain (MixedDomain n in Lean).

Fix μ1,μ2>0\mu_1, \mu_2 > 0μ1​,μ2​>0 and a delay τ>0\tau > 0τ>0. The problem (1.1)–(1.3) is

{utt(x,t)−Δu(x,t)=0in Ω×(0,+∞),u(x,t)=0on ΓD×(0,+∞),∂u∂ν(x,t)=−μ1ut(x,t)−μ2ut(x,t−τ)on ΓN×(0,+∞),\begin{cases} u_{tt}(x,t) - \Delta u(x,t) = 0 & \text{in } \Omega \times (0,+\infty),\\ u(x,t) = 0 & \text{on } \Gamma_D \times (0,+\infty),\\ \dfrac{\partial u}{\partial\nu}(x,t) = -\mu_1 u_t(x,t) - \mu_2 u_t(x,t-\tau) & \text{on } \Gamma_N \times (0,+\infty), \end{cases}⎩⎨⎧​utt​(x,t)−Δu(x,t)=0u(x,t)=0∂ν∂u​(x,t)=−μ1​ut​(x,t)−μ2​ut​(x,t−τ)​in Ω×(0,+∞),on ΓD​×(0,+∞),on ΓN​×(0,+∞),​

with initial data u(⋅,0)u(\cdot,0)u(⋅,0), ut(⋅,0)u_t(\cdot,0)ut​(⋅,0) and a history utu_tut​ on ΓN×(−τ,0)\Gamma_N \times (-\tau,0)ΓN​×(−τ,0) (1.4)–(1.5). The standard energy of a solution is (3.7)

E(t)=12∫Ω(∣ut(x,t)∣2+∣∇u(x,t)∣2) dx.\mathcal E(t) = \frac12\int_\Omega \big(|u_t(x,t)|^2 + |\nabla u(x,t)|^2\big)\,dx .E(t)=21​∫Ω​(∣ut​(x,t)∣2+∣∇u(x,t)∣2)dx.

Condition (1.8) of the paper is μ2<μ1\mu_2 < \mu_1μ2​<μ1​. This mission concerns the complementary case μ2≥μ1\mu_2 \ge \mu_1μ2​≥μ1​.

For real functions www on Ω\OmegaΩ, (5.11) defines q0(w)=∫ΓN∣w∣2 dΓq_0(w) = \int_{\Gamma_N} |w|^2\,d\Gammaq0​(w)=∫ΓN​​∣w∣2dΓ and q1(w)=∫Ω∣∇w∣2 dxq_1(w) = \int_\Omega |\nabla w|^2\,dxq1​(w)=∫Ω​∣∇w∣2dx.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1.2 (p. 1563)

If μ2≥μ1\mu_2 \ge \mu_1μ2​≥μ1​, there exist delays 0<τ0<τ1<⋯0 < \tau_0 < \tau_1 < \cdots0<τ0​<τ1​<⋯ and, for each kkk, a classical solution uku_kuk​ of (1.1)–(1.3) with delay τk\tau_kτk​ and a constant ck>0c_k > 0ck​>0 such that

Ek(t)=ckfor all t≥0.\mathcal E_k(t) = c_k \qquad \text{for all } t \ge 0 .Ek​(t)=ck​for all t≥0.

The statement fixes no formula for the delays and no value of the energy. It asserts only the existence of infinitely many delays for which the energy does not decay.

Milestones

  1. (5.1)–(5.2), pp. 1579–1580. If λ∈C\lambda \in \mathbb Cλ∈C and φ\varphiφ solves −Δφ+λ2φ=0-\Delta\varphi + \lambda^2\varphi = 0−Δφ+λ2φ=0 in Ω\OmegaΩ, φ=0\varphi = 0φ=0 on ΓD\Gamma_DΓD​ and ∂φ/∂ν=−(μ1+μ2e−λτ)λφ\partial\varphi/\partial\nu = -(\mu_1 + \mu_2 e^{-\lambda\tau})\lambda\varphi∂φ/∂ν=−(μ1​+μ2​e−λτ)λφ on ΓN\Gamma_NΓN​, then u=eλtφu = e^{\lambda t}\varphiu=eλtφ solves (1.1)–(1.3).
  2. (5.5)–(5.7), pp. 1580 and 1582. For b>0b > 0b>0, l∈Nl \in \mathbb Nl∈N and bτ=arccos⁡(−μ1/μ2)+2lπb\tau = \arccos(-\mu_1/\mu_2) + 2l\pibτ=arccos(−μ1​/μ2​)+2lπ:
cos⁡(bτ)=−μ1/μ2,μ2sin⁡(bτ)=μ22−μ12,(μ1+μ2e−ibτ) ib=bμ22−μ12.\cos(b\tau) = -\mu_1/\mu_2,\qquad \mu_2\sin(b\tau) = \sqrt{\mu_2^2-\mu_1^2},\qquad (\mu_1 + \mu_2e^{-ib\tau})\,ib = b\sqrt{\mu_2^2-\mu_1^2}.cos(bτ)=−μ1​/μ2​,μ2​sin(bτ)=μ22​−μ12​​,(μ1​+μ2​e−ibτ)ib=bμ22​−μ12​​.
  1. Case (a), μ1=μ2\mu_1 = \mu_2μ1​=μ2​, p. 1581. For a normalized mixed Dirichlet–Neumann eigenfunction φ\varphiφ with −Δφ=b2φ-\Delta\varphi = b^2\varphi−Δφ=b2φ and τ=(2l+1)π/b\tau = (2l+1)\pi/bτ=(2l+1)π/b, the function u=eibtφu = e^{ibt}\varphiu=eibtφ is a solution and
∫Ω(∣∇u∣2+∣ut∣2) dx=2b2(t≥0).\int_\Omega(|\nabla u|^2 + |u_t|^2)\,dx = 2b^2 \quad (t \ge 0).∫Ω​(∣∇u∣2+∣ut​∣2)dx=2b2(t≥0).
  1. Case (b), μ2>μ1\mu_2 > \mu_1μ2​>μ1​, pp. 1581–1582. A normalized minimizer φ\varphiφ of s q0(w)+s2q0(w)2+4q1(w)s\,q_0(w) + \sqrt{s^2q_0(w)^2 + 4q_1(w)}sq0​(w)+s2q0​(w)2+4q1​(w)​, where s=μ22−μ12s = \sqrt{\mu_2^2-\mu_1^2}s=μ22​−μ12​​, solves the variational problem (5.7) with 2b2b2b equal to the minimum value.

Significance

The result. Theorem 1.2 shows that the threshold μ2<μ1\mu_2 < \mu_1μ2​<μ1​ of Theorem 1.1 is sharp in the following sense: once the delayed weight reaches the instantaneous one, no geometric assumption restores asymptotic stability for every delay. Together, Theorems 1.1 and 1.2 separate robust from non-robust boundary feedbacks by a single inequality between the two gains. The explicit delays of case (a), τn,l=(2l+1)π/bn\tau_{n,l} = (2l+1)\pi/b_nτn,l​=(2l+1)π/bn​, become arbitrarily small or large. So even an arbitrarily short lag in an equally weighted feedback can remove decay.

The formalization. The paper proves the result. It has not been formalized, and Mathlib has no wave equation on domains, no mixed eigenvalue problems and no Sobolev spaces on domains. This mission produces:

  • a machine-checked statement of the instability half of the paper's dichotomy;
  • the reduction to a spectral problem as separate, checkable steps;
  • a precise record of what the paper leaves implicit. In case (b) the existence of the minimizer is assumed ("if the minimum … is attained"), and in case (a) the existence of Dirichlet–Neumann eigenfunctions is quoted.

Difficulty

Milestones 1 and 2 are calculus and trigonometry. The difficulty sits in producing φ\varphiφ. The goal needs a nonzero function φ\varphiφ that is C2C^2C2 in Ω\OmegaΩ and C1C^1C1 up to the boundary and solves an eigenvalue problem with mixed Dirichlet and Neumann (case (a)) or Dirichlet and Robin-type (case (b)) boundary conditions. Existence requires compactness of HΓD1(Ω)↪L2(Ω)H^1_{\Gamma_D}(\Omega) \hookrightarrow L^2(\Omega)HΓD​1​(Ω)↪L2(Ω) and of the trace into L2(ΓN)L^2(\Gamma_N)L2(ΓN​), followed by elliptic regularity up to a C2C^2C2 boundary. None of these is in Mathlib.

A shortcut does not work: in case (b) the frequency bbb enters the boundary condition, so φ\varphiφ is not an eigenfunction of a fixed self-adjoint operator. The page instead minimizes a non-quadratic functional, and its first-variation computation (5.18)–(5.19) needs care: the functional is not 2-homogeneous, so the normalization by 1+ε2∥v∥21 + \varepsilon^2\|v\|^21+ε2∥v∥2 does not literally give g(ε)≥g(0)g(\varepsilon) \ge g(0)g(ε)≥g(0), although the first-order condition is right.

Taking real parts does not give a real-valued solution with constant energy: in case (b) the energy of cos⁡(bt)φ\cos(bt)\varphicos(bt)φ oscillates.

Formalization scope

  • Solutions are complex-valued, u:Rn×R→Cu : \mathbb R^n \times \mathbb R \to \mathbb Cu:Rn×R→C, as the page's eλtφe^{\lambda t}\varphieλtφ with λ∈C\lambda \in \mathbb Cλ∈C are. ∣ut∣2|u_t|^2∣ut​∣2 and ∣∇u∣2=∑i∣∂iu∣2|\nabla u|^2 = \sum_i |\partial_i u|^2∣∇u∣2=∑i​∣∂i​u∣2 are squared moduli.
  • Classical solutions. A solution is C2C^2C2 on Ω×R\Omega \times \mathbb RΩ×R and C1C^1C1 on Ω‾×R\overline\Omega \times \mathbb RΩ×R. It solves the equations for t>0t > 0t>0, and its values at t≤0t \le 0t≤0 are the initial data and history. The normal derivative is the derivative within Ω‾\overline\OmegaΩ applied to ν\nuν. C2C^2C2 regularity up to the boundary is not required, because eigenfunctions of mixed problems generally lack it.
  • The domain. The C2C^2C2 boundary is given by a global defining function ψ\psiψ with Ω={ψ<0}\Omega = \{\psi < 0\}Ω={ψ<0}. The surface measure is pinned down by the Gauss–Green formula for all C1C^1C1 vector fields, which determines it uniquely.
  • Dropped hypotheses. The geometric hypotheses (1.6)–(1.7) and the parameter ξ\xiξ of (1.10) are not used in §5.1 and are omitted. This strengthens the statements.
  • Sobolev spaces. HΓD1(Ω)H^1_{\Gamma_D}(\Omega)HΓD​1​(Ω) is replaced in milestone 4 by the class of real functions that are C2C^2C2 in Ω\OmegaΩ, C1C^1C1 on Ω‾\overline\OmegaΩ and zero on ΓD\Gamma_DΓD​, both as the minimization class and as the test class.
  • Non-triviality. The goal requires the constant energy to be positive and the delays to be strictly increasing. Without positivity, the zero solution would satisfy "constant energy". Without strict monotonicity, one delay repeated would count as a sequence.

A complete development needs the following:

  • Green's first identity on C2C^2C2 domains for functions that are C1C^1C1 up to the boundary;
  • existence and regularity of eigenfunctions of the Laplacian with mixed boundary conditions;
  • in case (b), existence of the minimizer (Rellich compactness and the trace theorem).

These pieces are reusable well beyond this mission. Contributions of any of them, or of an alternative route to a φ\varphiφ with the required properties, are welcome.

Selected references

  • S. Nicaise, C. Pignotti, Stability and instability results of the wave equation with a delay term in the boundary or internal feedbacks, SIAM J. Control Optim. 45(5):1561–1585, 2006. https://doi.org/10.1137/060648891
  • R. Datko, J. Lagnese, M. P. Polis, An example on the effect of time delays in boundary feedback stabilization of wave equations, SIAM J. Control Optim. 24:152–156, 1986. https://doi.org/10.1137/0324007
  • R. Datko, Not all feedback stabilized hyperbolic systems are robust with respect to small time delays in their feedbacks, SIAM J. Control Optim. 26:697–713, 1988. https://doi.org/10.1137/0326040
  • G. Q. Xu, S. P. Yung, L. K. Li, Stabilization of wave systems with input delay in the boundary control, ESAIM Control Optim. Calc. Var. 12:770–785, 2006. https://doi.org/10.1051/cocv:2006021
7 thms2 active usersReviewed
Functional AnalysisMathematical PhysicsPartial Differential Equations·Captain: mikedeng1

Mathematical Methods in Quantum Mechanics XII: Self-Adjointness and Essential Spectrum of One-Particle Schrödinger OperatorsTextbook

Motivation

The Hamiltonian of a single nonrelativistic particle in Rn\mathbb R^nRn moving in a potential VVV is the Schrödinger operator H=−Δ+VH = -\Delta + VH=−Δ+V acting in L2(Rn)L^2(\mathbb R^n)L2(Rn). Before anything can be said about the dynamics or the energy levels of such a particle, one must know that HHH is a genuine observable: a self-adjoint operator on a specified domain. For potentials that decay at infinity one also wants the coarse structure of the spectrum, namely that it is bounded below and that everything below the continuum threshold 000 consists of isolated eigenvalues of finite multiplicity. The hydrogen atom, with the Coulomb potential −γ/∣x∣-\gamma/|x|−γ/∣x∣ in three dimensions, is the central example.

The self-adjointness results go back to T. Kato's 1951 paper on the Hamiltonians of atoms; the identification of the essential spectrum through relatively compact perturbations is due to H. Weyl's theorem and its later extensions. This mission follows Chapter 10 of G. Teschl, Mathematical Methods in Quantum Mechanics (AMS GSM 99, 2009), Sections 10.1, 10.2, 10.4 and 10.5.

Setting

L2(Rn)L^2(\mathbb R^n)L2(Rn) is the complex Hilbert space of square integrable functions with respect to Lebesgue measure. The free Schrödinger operator is H0=−ΔH_0 = -\DeltaH0​=−Δ with domain the Sobolev space H2(Rn)={f∈L2∣∣p∣2f^(p)∈L2}H^2(\mathbb R^n) = \{ f \in L^2 \mid |p|^2 \hat f(p) \in L^2 \}H2(Rn)={f∈L2∣∣p∣2f^​(p)∈L2}; equivalently, H0H_0H0​ is the inverse Fourier transform of the maximally defined multiplication by p2p^2p2. Units are ℏ=1\hbar = 1ℏ=1 and mass m=1/2m = 1/2m=1/2.

A real function VVV acts by the multiplication operator (Vf)(x)=V(x)f(x)(Vf)(x) = V(x) f(x)(Vf)(x)=V(x)f(x) on its maximal domain {f∈L2∣Vf∈L2}\{f \in L^2 \mid Vf \in L^2\}{f∈L2∣Vf∈L2}. The sum H0+VH_0 + VH0​+V is defined on D(H0)∩D(V)\mathfrak D(H_0) \cap \mathfrak D(V)D(H0​)∩D(V). L∞∞(Rn)L^\infty_\infty(\mathbb R^n)L∞∞​(Rn) denotes the bounded Borel functions vanishing at infinity, and Cc∞(Rn)C_c^\infty(\mathbb R^n)Cc∞​(Rn) the smooth compactly supported functions.

For a linear operator AAA, the resolvent RA(z)=(A−z)−1R_A(z) = (A - z)^{-1}RA​(z)=(A−z)−1 exists when A−zA - zA−z maps D(A)\mathfrak D(A)D(A) bijectively onto L2L^2L2 with bounded inverse; the resolvent set ρ(A)\rho(A)ρ(A) collects such zzz and σ(A)=C∖ρ(A)\sigma(A) = \mathbb C \setminus \rho(A)σ(A)=C∖ρ(A). The point spectrum σp(A)\sigma_p(A)σp​(A) is the set of eigenvalues; the discrete spectrum σd(A)\sigma_d(A)σd​(A) consists of the eigenvalues that are isolated in σ(A)\sigma(A)σ(A) and have finite-dimensional eigenspace; the essential spectrum is σess(A)=σ(A)∖σd(A)\sigma_{ess}(A) = \sigma(A) \setminus \sigma_d(A)σess​(A)=σ(A)∖σd​(A). An operator KKK is relatively compact with respect to AAA if D(A)⊆D(K)\mathfrak D(A) \subseteq \mathfrak D(K)D(A)⊆D(K) and KRA(z)K R_A(z)KRA​(z) is compact for one z∈ρ(A)z \in \rho(A)z∈ρ(A). AAA is bounded from below if ⟨ψ,Aψ⟩≥γ∥ψ∥2\langle \psi, A\psi\rangle \ge \gamma\|\psi\|^2⟨ψ,Aψ⟩≥γ∥ψ∥2 on D(A)\mathfrak D(A)D(A) for some real γ\gammaγ, and a subspace is a core of a closed operator if the closure of the restriction to it is the operator itself.

The hydrogen Hamiltonian is H(1)=−Δ−γ/∣x∣H^{(1)} = -\Delta - \gamma/|x|H(1)=−Δ−γ/∣x∣ on L2(R3)L^2(\mathbb R^3)L2(R3). A function in L2(Rn)L^2(\mathbb R^n)L2(Rn) is positive if it is ≥0\ge 0≥0 a.e. and not a.e. zero, and strictly positive if it is >0> 0>0 a.e.; a bounded operator is positivity improving if it maps positive functions to strictly positive ones.

Formalization targets

Goal: self-adjointness and essential spectrum (Theorem 10.2)

Let n≥1n \ge 1n≥1 and VVV real with V∈L∞∞(Rn)V \in L^\infty_\infty(\mathbb R^n)V∈L∞∞​(Rn) if n>3n > 3n>3 and V∈L∞∞(Rn)+L2(Rn)V \in L^\infty_\infty(\mathbb R^n) + L^2(\mathbb R^n)V∈L∞∞​(Rn)+L2(Rn) if n≤3n \le 3n≤3. Then VVV is relatively compact with respect to H0H_0H0​, and H=H0+VH = H_0 + VH=H0​+V has domain H2(Rn)H^2(\mathbb R^n)H2(Rn), is self-adjoint and bounded from below, satisfies

σess(H)=[0,∞),\sigma_{ess}(H) = [0,\infty),σess​(H)=[0,∞),

and has Cc∞(Rn)C_c^\infty(\mathbb R^n)Cc∞​(Rn) as a core.

Milestones

  • Sobolev bound (Lemma 10.1). For n≤3n \le 3n≤3, every ψ∈H2(Rn)\psi \in H^2(\mathbb R^n)ψ∈H2(Rn) is continuous and vanishes at infinity, and for every a>0a > 0a>0 there is b>0b > 0b>0 with ∥ψ∥∞≤a∥H0ψ∥+b∥ψ∥\|\psi\|_\infty \le a\|H_0\psi\| + b\|\psi\|∥ψ∥∞​≤a∥H0​ψ∥+b∥ψ∥ on H2(Rn)H^2(\mathbb R^n)H2(Rn).
  • Virial theorem (Theorem 10.3). If VVV is homogeneous of degree −1-1−1 under dilations, every normalized eigenfunction of H0+VH_0 + VH0​+V with eigenvalue λ\lambdaλ satisfies λ=−⟨ψ,H0ψ⟩=12⟨ψ,Vψ⟩\lambda = -\langle\psi, H_0\psi\rangle = \frac12\langle\psi, V\psi\rangleλ=−⟨ψ,H0​ψ⟩=21​⟨ψ,Vψ⟩; in particular λ<0\lambda < 0λ<0.
  • Hydrogen spectrum (Corollary 10.4). For γ>0\gamma > 0γ>0, σp(H(1))=σd(H(1))\sigma_p(H^{(1)}) = \sigma_d(H^{(1)})σp​(H(1))=σd​(H(1)) is a strictly increasing sequence of negative numbers converging to 000.
  • Hydrogen eigenvalues (Theorem 10.9, eigenvalue part). For γ>0\gamma > 0γ>0 the eigenvalues of H(1)H^{(1)}H(1) are En=−(γ/(2(n+1)))2E_n = -(\gamma/(2(n+1)))^2En​=−(γ/(2(n+1)))2, n∈N0n \in \mathbb N_0n∈N0​.
  • Perron–Frobenius for positivity improving operators (Theorem 10.11). If AAA is bounded, self-adjoint, real and positivity improving and ∥A∥\|A\|∥A∥ is an eigenvalue, it is simple with a strictly positive eigenfunction.
  • Nondegenerate ground state (Theorem 10.12). If H0+VH_0 + VH0​+V is self-adjoint, bounded below, has Cc∞C_c^\inftyCc∞​ as a core, and E0=min⁡σ(H)E_0 = \min\sigma(H)E0​=minσ(H) is an eigenvalue, then E0E_0E0​ is simple with a strictly positive eigenfunction.

Significance

The result. Theorem 10.2 is the existence theorem for one-particle quantum mechanics with decaying potentials. It makes H0+VH_0 + VH0​+V an observable on the natural domain H2H^2H2, guarantees a lowest energy, and places the continuum exactly at [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), so that all spectral information below zero is carried by bound states. Its three-dimensional case covers the Coulomb potential, and the same scheme (relative boundedness, Kato–Rellich, relative compactness, Weyl) is the template for the NNN-body HVZ theorem. The virial theorem, the qualitative and the explicit hydrogen spectrum, and the nondegeneracy of ground states are the standard first applications.

Formalizing it. None of these statements is formalized. Mathlib has the L2L^2L2 Fourier transform, tempered distributions and Sobolev spaces on the distribution side, and LinearPMap with adjoints and closures, but no free Schrödinger operator as an unbounded operator on L2L^2L2, no resolvent set or essential spectrum for unbounded operators, and no self-adjointness theorem for −Δ+V-\Delta + V−Δ+V. The mission asks for proofs of Teschl's statements and, with them, a reusable definition of H0H_0H0​ on H2(Rn)H^2(\mathbb R^n)H2(Rn) and of maximally defined multiplication operators.

Difficulty

The goal combines several chapters of the book. A proof needs self-adjointness of H0H_0H0​ on H2H^2H2 via the Fourier transform, the Sobolev bound of Lemma 10.1 to get D(H0)⊆D(V)\mathfrak D(H_0) \subseteq \mathfrak D(V)D(H0​)⊆D(V) with relative bound zero, the Kato–Rellich theorem, compactness of operators of the form g(x)f(p)g(x)f(p)g(x)f(p) (Lemma 7.11) to obtain relative compactness, Weyl's theorem on the invariance of the essential spectrum, σ(H0)=[0,∞)\sigma(H_0) = [0,\infty)σ(H0​)=[0,∞) with no eigenvalues, and the fact that Cc∞C_c^\inftyCc∞​ is a core for H0H_0H0​. None of these intermediate results is in Mathlib for unbounded operators.

The milestones add their own difficulties: the virial theorem requires the dilation group and a derivative argument on domains; Corollary 10.4 requires a variational argument producing infinitely many negative eigenvalues; Theorem 10.9 requires separation of variables in spherical coordinates and the Laguerre polynomials; and Theorem 10.12 uses the Trotter product formula and strong resolvent convergence to transfer positivity from e−tH0e^{-tH_0}e−tH0​ to e−tHe^{-tH}e−tH.

Formalization scope

Rn\mathbb R^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) with Lebesgue measure and L2(Rn)L^2(\mathbb R^n)L2(Rn) is Mathlib's Lp ℂ 2 volume, a separable complex Hilbert space. Unbounded operators are Mathlib LinearPMaps, sums of unbounded operators are LinearPMap sums on the intersection of domains, self-adjointness is Mathlib's IsSelfAdjoint, and "core" is LinearPMap.HasCore. The resolvent is the bounded two-sided inverse of A−zA - zA−z; ρ(A)\rho(A)ρ(A), σ(A)\sigma(A)σ(A), σp\sigma_pσp​, σd\sigma_dσd​ and σess\sigma_{ess}σess​ are defined from it, and Mathlib's Banach-algebra spectrum is not used. Compactness is IsCompactOperator.

The Fourier transform is Mathlib's unitary L2L^2L2 transform with kernel e−2πi⟨x,ξ⟩e^{-2\pi i\langle x,\xi\rangle}e−2πi⟨x,ξ⟩, not Teschl's (2π)−n/2e−ipx(2\pi)^{-n/2}e^{-ipx}(2π)−n/2e−ipx. H0H_0H0​ is defined as F−1(2π∣ξ∣)2F\mathcal F^{-1}(2\pi|\xi|)^2\mathcal FF−1(2π∣ξ∣)2F and H2H^2H2 as {f∣(2π∣ξ∣)2Ff∈L2}\{f \mid (2\pi|\xi|)^2 \mathcal F f \in L^2\}{f∣(2π∣ξ∣)2Ff∈L2}; both coincide with the book's objects, independently of the normalization. No projection-valued measure or functional calculus is taken as data. C∞(Rn)C_\infty(\mathbb R^n)C∞​(Rn) is Mathlib's space of continuous functions vanishing at infinity, and positivity of complex values is taken in ComplexOrder.

The virial hypothesis U(−s)VU(s)=e−sVU(-s)VU(s) = e^{-s}VU(−s)VU(s)=e−sV is stated as V(esx)=e−sV(x)V(e^s x) = e^{-s}V(x)V(esx)=e−sV(x) for almost every xxx, for every sss, which is what the operator identity means for a multiplication operator. Corollary 10.4's index set {Ej−1}j∈N0\{E_{j-1}\}_{j\in\mathbb N_0}{Ej−1​}j∈N0​​ is read as the sequence E0,E1,…E_0, E_1, \dotsE0​,E1​,…. Only the eigenvalue formula of Theorem 10.9 is included, not its explicit eigenbasis.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the only hypotheses of the goal are the function-space conditions on VVV and n≥1n \ge 1n≥1. Neither D(H0)⊆D(V)\mathfrak D(H_0) \subseteq \mathfrak D(V)D(H0​)⊆D(V), a relative bound below one, nor closedness of H0+VH_0 + VH0​+V is assumed; the equality of the domain with H2(Rn)H^2(\mathbb R^n)H2(Rn) and the relative compactness of VVV are conclusions. The essential spectrum requires all three of "eigenvalue", "isolated" and "finite multiplicity" in its complement, so [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) is a genuine identification.

Selected references

  • G. Teschl, Mathematical Methods in Quantum Mechanics, With Applications to Schrödinger Operators, Graduate Studies in Mathematics 99, AMS, 2009, Chapter 10. https://doi.org/10.1090/gsm/099
  • T. Kato, Fundamental properties of Hamiltonian operators of Schrödinger type, Transactions of the AMS 70 (1951), 195–211. https://doi.org/10.1090/S0002-9947-1951-0041010-X
  • M. Reed and B. Simon, Methods of Modern Mathematical Physics II: Fourier Analysis, Self-Adjointness (Section X.2) and IV: Analysis of Operators (Sections XIII.4, XIII.12), Academic Press, 1975, 1978.
  • H. L. Cycon, R. G. Froese, W. Kirsch and B. Simon, Schrödinger Operators, Springer, 1987.
20 thms2 active usersReviewed
PreviousPage 2 of 6Next

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

About Prove2Me

Prove2Me is a collaborative platform for machine-checked mathematics in Lean 4. Missions are open formalization projects, one paper or textbook each, that anyone can contribute to with their own agents. Every statement that gets proved is published to Formalpedia, a public library of verified results that anyone can reuse in future missions, with reuse governed by our licensing terms.

How Prove2Me worksResearch paper
SKILL.mdTourFAQContactTerms
© 2026 Prove2Me